Quarterlytics / Technology / Semiconductors / IQE / FY2012 Annual Report

IQE
Annual Report 2012

IQE · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker IQE
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry Semiconductors
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · IQE
Loading PDF…
enabling advanced technologies

annual report & financial statements

2
1
0
2

E
Q

I

 
 
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Five	
  year	
  financial	
  summary

Revenue

EBITDA	
  (see	
  below)

Operating	
  profit

- Before	
  exceptional	
  items

- After	
  exceptional	
  items

Retained	
  profit/(loss)

- Before	
  exceptional	
  items

- After	
  exceptional	
  items

Net	
  cash	
  flow	
  from	
  operations

- Before	
  exceptional	
  items

- After	
  exceptional	
  items

Free	
  cash	
  flow*

- Before	
  exceptional	
  items

- After	
  exceptional	
  items

Net	
  (debt)	
  /	
  funds

2012
£’000

87,961

16,437

7,584

7,014

7,201

6,631

4,109

4,109

(2,139)

(2,139)

(15,483)

2011
£’000

75,318

13,955

7,373

7,373

8,443

8,443

10,823

10,823

(8,585)

(8,585)

(3,921)

2010
£’000

72,650

13,115

7,208

7,208

7,506

7,506

10,250

10,250

3,315

3,315

7,021

2009
£’000

2008
£’000

52,652

60,485

8,051

8,407

3,044

3,044

2,058

2,058

8,139

7,712

3,906

3,479

4,000

69

2,546

(1,385)

8,526

7,461

690

(375)

(14,931)

(18,135)

Shareholders’	
  funds

90,189

72,750

62,274

29,837

EPS	
  –	
  adjusted**

EPS	
  –	
  unadjusted

Diluted	
  EPS	
  –	
  adjusted**

Diluted	
  EPS	
  –	
  unadjusted	
  

1.59p

1.16p

1.51p

1.10p

1.86p

1.62p

1.74p

1.51p

1.91p

1.63p

1.76p

1.50p

0.68p

0.47p

0.64p

0.44p

30,218

0.79p

(0.32p)

0.79p

(0.32p)

*	
  

Free	
   cash	
   flow	
   is	
  defined	
   as	
   net	
   cash	
   flow	
   before	
   acquisitions,	
   contingent	
   deferred	
   consideration	
   (settled	
   through	
   contractual	
  
discounts),	
  financing	
  and	
  net	
  interest	
  paid

**	
   adjusted	
  EPS	
  measures	
  exclude	
   non-­‐cash	
  charges	
  for	
  share	
  based	
  payments,	
   non-­‐cash	
  acquisition	
  related	
  charges	
  and	
  exceptional	
  

items	
  (see	
  note	
  9	
  to	
  the	
  accounts)

EBITDA	
  has	
  been	
  calculated	
  as	
  follows:

Profit/(loss)	
  after	
  tax

Tax

Interest

Share	
  based	
  payments

Exceptional	
  items

Depreciation

Amortisation	
  of	
  intangible	
  assets

2012
£‘000

6,631

(503)

886

1,360

570

5,998

1,495

2011
£’000

8,443

(1,551)

481

1,284

-­‐

4,175

1,123

2010
£’000

7,506

(1,172)

874

1,302

-­‐

3,619

986

EBITDA

16,437

13,955

13,115

2009
£’000

2,058

-­‐

986

898

-­‐

3,372

737

8,051

2008
£’000

(1,385)

-­‐

1,454

884

3,931

3,076

447

8,407

1

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

IQE supplies 
wafers for over 
two billion 
wireless chips 
and more than 
one billion 
optoelectronic 
chips each 
year

2

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

What’s	
  inside?

Five-­‐year	
  financial	
  summary	
  

1
......................................................................................................

Chairman’s	
  statement	
  

5
...............................................................................................................

The	
  evolution	
  of	
  semiconductors	
  

7
...............................................................................................

What	
  we	
  do	
  

...............................................................................................................................

9

Our	
  strategy	
  

............................................................................................................................

10

Our	
  competitive	
  advantage	
  

.....................................................................................................

11

Recent	
  acquisitions	
  

..................................................................................................................

13

Our	
  business	
  model	
  

.................................................................................................................

15

Our	
  markets	
  

.............................................................................................................................

17

Current	
  trading	
  and	
  outlook	
  

....................................................................................................

24

Operational	
  highlights	
  

.............................................................................................................

25	
  

Financial	
  highlights	
  

..................................................................................................................

26

Innovation,	
  research	
  &	
  development	
  

.......................................................................................

28

Our	
  commitment	
  

....................................................................................................................

29

Risks	
  and	
  risk	
  management	
  

.....................................................................................................

31

Directors’	
  biographies	
  

..............................................................................................................

32

Corporate	
  governance	
  report	
  

..................................................................................................

34

Directors’	
  report	
  

......................................................................................................................

38

Remuneration	
  report	
  

...............................................................................................................

42

Independent	
  auditors’	
  report	
  

...................................................................................................

47

Financial	
  statements	
  

...............................................................................................................

49

	
   Consolidated	
  income	
  statemen .............................................................................................

t	
  

49

	
   Consolidated	
  balance	
  sheet ...................................................................................................

50

	
   Consolidated	
  statement	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  equity ..........................................................................

51

	
   Consolidated	
  cash	
  flow	
  statement .........................................................................................

52

	
   Parent	
  company	
  balance	
  sheet ..............................................................................................

53

	
   Parent	
  company	
  statement	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  equity.....................................................................

54

	
   Parent	
  company	
  cash	
  flow	
  statement ....................................................................................

55

Notes	
  to	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  

............................................................................................

56

Professional	
  advisers	
  

...............................................................................................................

81

3

	
  
	
  
	
  
	
  
	
  
	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Successful completion 
of three strategic and 
transformational deals 
in twelve months

4

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Chairman’s	
  statement

You	
  will	
  read	
  more	
  in	
  this	
  annual	
  
report	
  about	
  the	
  highs	
  and	
  lows	
  of	
  
the	
  past	
  year.	
  	
  A	
  tough	
  start	
  to	
  the	
  
year,	
  as	
  we	
  grappled	
  with	
  the	
  tail	
  
end	
  of	
  a	
  de-­‐stocking	
  by	
  a	
  few	
  major	
  
customers,	
  was	
  accompanied	
  by	
  
three	
  hugely	
  important	
  strategic	
  
transactions	
  which	
  have	
  
significantly	
  strengthened	
  our	
  
market	
  and	
  technology	
  leadership.	
  	
  
A	
  very	
  strong	
  second	
  half	
  
performance	
  followed.	
  	
  But	
  be	
  
assured,	
  we	
  do	
  not	
  rest	
  on	
  our	
  
laurels.	
  	
  There	
  is	
  much	
  hard	
  work	
  
ahead	
  if	
  we	
  are	
  to	
  fulfil	
  our	
  
ambitions	
  and	
  potential.

I	
  would	
  like	
  to	
  take	
  this	
  opportunity	
  
to	
  thank	
  everyone	
  who	
  makes	
  our	
  
business	
  successful.	
  To	
  you,	
  our	
  
shareholders,	
  thank	
  you	
  for	
  your	
  
continued	
  support.

I	
  also	
  extend	
  my	
  sincere	
  
appreciation	
  to	
  our	
  dedicated	
  
management	
  and	
  staff	
  around	
  the	
  
world	
  and	
  across	
  all	
  of	
  our	
  
operations	
  for	
  their	
  passion	
  and	
  
devotion	
  to	
  making	
  IQE	
  the	
  world	
  
leader	
  that	
  it	
  is	
  today.

What	
  is	
  also	
  remarkable,	
  is	
  that	
  it	
  is	
  
semiconductors	
  that	
  has	
  enabled	
  
every	
  single	
  one	
  of	
  these	
  
revolutions.	
  	
  	
  Semiconductors	
  are	
  
the	
  fundamental	
  building	
  blocks	
  of	
  
the	
  electronics	
  industry.	
  But	
  what	
  is	
  
even	
  more	
  relevant	
  to	
  IQE	
  is	
  that	
  
these	
  foundations	
  are	
  shifting.	
  	
  
Silicon	
  has	
  been	
  pushed	
  to	
  its	
  
fundamental	
  limits,	
  defined	
  by	
  the	
  
laws	
  of	
  physics,	
  and	
  it	
  is	
  already	
  
being	
  superseded	
  by	
  advanced	
  
‘compound’	
  semiconductors.	
  	
  
Furthermore,	
  what	
  is	
  inevitable	
  is	
  
that	
  the	
  shift	
  to	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  will	
  only	
  accelerate	
  
as	
  mankind	
  continues	
  to	
  innovate	
  
and	
  demand	
  faster,	
  more	
  efficient,	
  
and	
  more	
  powerful	
  devices.

Akin	
  to	
  the	
  emergence	
  of	
  the	
  first	
  
portable	
  phones,	
  or	
  the	
  first	
  digital	
  
cameras,	
  we	
  are	
  starting	
  to	
  see	
  
glimpses	
  of	
  what	
  lies	
  ahead:	
  
revolutions	
  in	
  lighting,	
  energy	
  
generation,	
  gesture	
  recognition,	
  
optical	
  communication,	
  and	
  pico	
  
projection.	
  	
  Nevertheless,	
  whilst	
  it	
  
is	
  difficult	
  to	
  anticipate	
  the	
  full	
  
extent	
  of	
  how	
  technology	
  will	
  
change	
  our	
  lives	
  over	
  the	
  next	
  25	
  
years,	
  it	
  is	
  clear	
  to	
  me	
  that	
  
compound	
  semiconductors	
  will	
  be	
  
at	
  the	
  very	
  heart	
  of	
  the	
  
development	
  of	
  these	
  new	
  
technologies.

I	
  am	
  proud	
  to	
  be	
  part	
  of	
  a	
  company	
  
that	
  lies	
  at	
  the	
  heart	
  of	
  the	
  
technology	
  that	
  has,	
  and	
  will	
  
continue,	
  to	
  transform	
  the	
  way	
  we	
  
live	
  our	
  lives.	
  	
  	
  As	
  you	
  can	
  tell,	
  it	
  is	
  
clear	
  to	
  me	
  that	
  we	
  have	
  superb	
  
opportunities	
  ahead,	
  with	
  the	
  
ambitions,	
  commitment	
  and	
  drive	
  
to	
  match.

5

It	
  is	
  my	
  pleasure	
  to	
  introduce	
  IQE’s	
  
Annual	
  Report	
  for	
  2012.	
  

This	
  year	
  marks	
  IQE’s	
  25th	
  
anniversary.	
  	
  As	
  I	
  reflect	
  on	
  the	
  
technology	
  changes	
  over	
  the	
  past	
  
25	
  years,	
  I	
  find	
  the	
  extent	
  and	
  pace	
  
of	
  change	
  remarkable,	
  with	
  	
  
advances	
  in	
  technology	
  that	
  have	
  
changed	
  our	
  lives	
  in	
  ways	
  we	
  could	
  
not	
  have	
  imagined	
  25	
  years	
  ago.

In	
  a	
  single	
  generation	
  we	
  have	
  
witnessed	
  not	
  only	
  the	
  birth	
  of	
  the	
  
internet,	
  but	
  we	
  have	
  seen	
  it	
  
revolutionise	
  the	
  way	
  we	
  work,	
  
shop,	
  entertain	
  ourselves	
  and	
  even,	
  
for	
  some	
  at	
  least,	
  socialise.	
  	
  	
  We	
  
have	
  not	
  only	
  seen	
  the	
  introduction	
  
of	
  mobile	
  phones,	
  with	
  their	
  brick-­‐
like	
  form	
  and	
  voice-­‐only	
  capability,	
  
but	
  we	
  have	
  witnessed	
  this	
  
transform	
  into	
  the	
  multi-­‐function	
  
smart	
  phone	
  revolution	
  of	
  a	
  hyper-­‐
connected	
  world.	
  	
  	
  We	
  have	
  
experienced	
  large	
  industries	
  which	
  
took	
  generations	
  to	
  mature,	
  
seemingly	
  disappear	
  overnight:	
  
celluloid	
  cameras	
  displaced	
  by	
  
digital,	
  CDs	
  emerge	
  and	
  are	
  then	
  
replace	
  by	
  downloads.

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The World continues to demand faster, smaller and 
more power efficient devices and circuits.  Due to the 
fundamental laws of physics, these devices and 
circuits will inevitably transition from silicon to 
compound semiconductors

Silicon	
  IC	
  revolution

Compound	
  
semiconductors	
  in	
  
production

Dawn	
  of	
  silicon	
  IC	
  revolution

Silicon	
  comes	
  of	
  age

1960	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  1970	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  1980	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  1990	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  2000	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  2010	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  2020	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  2030

“The next quantum 
leap in technology 
will be achieved by 
combining the 
advanced 
properties of 
compound 
semiconductors 
with the scale and 
cost advantages of 
the mature silicon 
industry”

Fixed	
  line	
  comms

Cellular	
  handsets

Base	
  stations

Radar

Infrared	
  sensing

Lighting

Photovoltaics

Switching

Computing

"Compound III-V transistors could begin to replace traditional silicon 
technology around 2015"

Senior Intel Executive

6

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The	
  evolution	
  of	
  semiconductors

The	
  importance	
  of	
  
materials	
  throughout	
  
history

From	
  the	
  stone	
  age,	
  iron	
  age,	
  and	
  
bronze	
  age,	
  through	
  to	
  the	
  
industrial	
  revolution,	
  the	
  space	
  
race,	
  the	
  electronics	
  revolution	
  and	
  
the	
  digital	
  revolution,	
  the	
  evolution	
  
of	
  mankind	
  has	
  been	
  enabled	
  by	
  
innovations	
  in	
  material	
  science.

The	
  elements	
  

Every	
  material	
  in	
  the	
  universe	
  is	
  
made	
  from	
  one	
  or	
  more	
  of	
  the	
  
fundamental	
  elements.	
  	
  It	
  is	
  the	
  
properties	
  of	
  these	
  elements	
  which	
  
has	
  enabled	
  the	
  evolution	
  of	
  
mankind.	
  	
  	
  There	
  are	
  118	
  elements	
  
of	
  which	
  around	
  100	
  are	
  naturally	
  
occurring.	
  These	
  are	
  recorded	
  in	
  
the	
  periodic	
  table	
  where	
  they	
  are	
  
arranged	
  in	
  groups	
  according	
  to	
  
their	
  properties.

The	
  evolution	
  of	
  
semiconductors	
  

Semiconductors	
  are	
  a	
  remarkable	
  
combination	
  of	
  elements	
  that	
  have	
  
the	
  ability	
  to	
  both	
  conduct	
  and	
  
insulate	
  electric	
  current.	
  	
  It	
  is	
  these	
  
phenomena	
  that	
  have	
  enabled	
  the	
  
electronics	
  revolution	
  that	
  has	
  
transformed	
  our	
  lives	
  from	
  the	
  
early	
  1960s	
  through	
  to	
  the	
  present	
  
day.

Silicon	
  has	
  been	
  the	
  backbone	
  of	
  
the	
  electronics	
  revolution	
  from	
  the	
  
1960s	
  by	
  virtue	
  of	
  the	
  continuous	
  
miniaturization	
  of	
  the	
  electronic	
  
circuits.	
  	
  This	
  concept,	
  which	
  was	
  
expressed	
  by	
  one	
  of	
  the	
  founders	
  of	
  
Intel,	
  Gordon	
  Moore,	
  has	
  become	
  
known	
  as	
  “Moore’s	
  Law”.

Impressive	
  as	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  silicon	
  
has	
  been	
  on	
  our	
  lives,	
  it	
  has	
  very	
  
basic	
  properties	
  in	
  the	
  context	
  of	
  
the	
  broader	
  family	
  of	
  
semiconducting	
  materials.	
  This	
  is	
  
why	
  human	
  innovation	
  has	
  turned	
  
to	
  the	
  advanced	
  properties	
  of	
  other	
  
semiconducting	
  compounds	
  to	
  	
  
enable	
  the	
  dawn	
  of	
  the	
  digital	
  
revolution.	
  	
  	
  It’s	
  mankind’s	
  ability	
  to	
  
harness	
  the	
  advanced	
  properties	
  of	
  
the	
  full	
  range	
  of	
  semiconducting	
  
materials	
  that	
  will	
  drive	
  the	
  digital	
  
revolution	
  for	
  generations	
  to	
  come.	
  	
  
This	
  is	
  the	
  world	
  of	
  advanced	
  or	
  
“compound”	
  semiconductors.

The	
  early	
  years	
  of	
  
compound	
  
semiconductors

Whether	
  you	
  realise	
  it	
  or	
  not,	
  
compound	
  semiconductors	
  have	
  
already	
  revolutionised	
  your	
  life.

The	
  early	
  markets	
  for	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  have	
  been	
  in	
  laser,	
  
LED,	
  and	
  wireless	
  applications.	
  In	
  
other	
  words,	
  the	
  advent	
  of	
  the	
  
internet,	
  fibre	
  optic	
  communication	
  
and	
  the	
  smartphone	
  revolution	
  
have	
  been	
  fundamentally	
  
dependent	
  on	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  technologies.	
  	
  	
  

The	
  years	
  ahead

The	
  trends	
  are	
  clear,	
  	
  applications	
  
begin	
  their	
  lives	
  based	
  on	
  silicon	
  
technology,	
  but	
  inevitably	
  
transition	
  to	
  	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  as	
  human	
  
innovation	
  demands	
  more	
  from	
  	
  
materials.

But	
  this	
  is	
  only	
  the	
  tip	
  of	
  the	
  
iceberg.	
  Compound	
  semiconductor	
  
technology	
  will	
  lie	
  at	
  the	
  heart	
  of	
  
human	
  innovation	
  for	
  generations	
  
to	
  come.	
  	
  We	
  are	
  at	
  an	
  exciting	
  
inflection	
  point,	
  and	
  at	
  a	
  time	
  when	
  
the	
  rate	
  of	
  change	
  has	
  never	
  been	
  
quicker	
  and	
  continues	
  to	
  gather	
  
pace.

“IQE is uniquely 
positioned to enable 
an exploit this 
opportunity by virtue 
of its unparalleled 
breadth of 
compound 
semiconductor 
technologies and its 
advanced silicon 
technologies.”

The	
  next	
  quantum	
  leap

Of	
  course,	
  the	
  mass	
  adoption	
  of	
  
new	
  technologies	
  is	
  more	
  than	
  just	
  
a	
  function	
  of	
  what	
  is	
  possible.	
  

Rather,	
  it	
  is	
  a	
  function	
  of	
  cost	
  
versus	
  performance.

Compound	
  semiconductors	
  will	
  
continue	
  to	
  gather	
  momentum	
  in	
  
their	
  own	
  right	
  as	
  the	
  industry	
  
continues	
  to	
  increase	
  scale	
  which	
  is	
  
enabling	
  	
  technology	
  to	
  advance	
  
and	
  costs	
  to	
  reduce.

But,	
  the	
  next	
  quantum	
  leap	
  in	
  
technology	
  will	
  be	
  achieved	
  by	
  
combining	
  the	
  advanced	
  properties	
  
of	
  compound	
  semi-­‐conductors	
  with	
  
the	
  scale	
  and	
  cost	
  advantages	
  of	
  
the	
  mature	
  silicon	
  industry.

IQE	
  is	
  	
  uniquely	
  positioned	
  to	
  both	
  
enable	
  and	
  exploit	
  this	
  opportunity	
  
by	
  virtue	
  of	
  its	
  unparalleled	
  breadth	
  
of	
  compound	
  semi-­‐conductor	
  
technologies	
  and	
  its	
  advanced	
  
silicon	
  technologies.	
  

This	
  is	
  why	
  we	
  are	
  the	
  technology	
  
partner	
  for	
  governments	
  and	
  “Blue	
  
Chips”	
  alike	
  in	
  developing	
  
“compound	
  semiconductors	
  on	
  
Silicon.”

7

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

1988

2008: Voice
Silicon based technology

2013: Voice, data, email, internet, video streaming ...
Compound semiconductor enabled technology

enabling advanced 
wireless, photonic and 
electronic technologies 
since 1988

8

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

What	
  we	
  do

The	
  supply	
  chain

Our	
  core	
  IP	
  is	
  “Epitaxy”

IQE	
  designs	
  and	
  manufactures	
  
advanced	
  semiconductor	
  materials.	
  	
  
Our	
  finished	
  products	
  are	
  
compound	
  semiconductor	
  wafers	
  
(also	
  called	
  “epiwafers”).

Our	
  products	
  are	
  bespoke.	
  	
  We	
  
manufacture	
  to	
  the	
  exact	
  technical	
  
specifications	
  required	
  by	
  our	
  
customers.	
  	
  

Our	
  customers	
  fabricate	
  our	
  wafers	
  
into	
  the	
  “chips”	
  that	
  form	
  the	
  
critical	
  components	
  for	
  a	
  wide	
  
range	
  of	
  wireless	
  communication	
  
and	
  photonic	
  devices.	
  

IQE	
  manufactures	
  epiwafers	
  using	
  
a	
  nano	
  technology	
  called	
  “Epitaxy”.

Epitaxy	
  is	
  a	
  form	
  of	
  atomic	
  
engineering	
  that	
  requires	
  high	
  
specification	
  cleanrooms,	
  
sophisticated	
  production	
  tools	
  and	
  
high	
  levels	
  of	
  intellectual	
  property.	
  

Essentially,	
  we	
  grow	
  atomically	
  thin	
  
films	
  of	
  crystals	
  on	
  a	
  substrate.	
  	
  The	
  
substrate	
  is	
  simply	
  a	
  physical	
  and	
  
electric	
  template	
  required	
  in	
  order	
  
to	
  handle	
  our	
  finished	
  product.	
  	
  It’s	
  
the	
  combination	
  of	
  layers	
  produced	
  
by	
  IQE	
  that	
  gives	
  the	
  epiwafer	
  its	
  
properties.	
  	
  The	
  films	
  are	
  grown	
  
atomic	
  layer	
  by	
  atomic	
  layer.

Epitaxy is the key 
enabling 
technology 
necessary for the 
efficient 
manufacture of 
compound 
semiconductors

Our customers: 
Chip specialists

OEMs: 
System specialists

Our customers fabricate our 
wafers into chips

OEMs utilise these chips to 
make devices and systems

9

IQE: Materials specialistsWe make advanced semiconductor wafers in high spec cleanrooms using sophisticated tools and extensive IPIQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Our vision 
To be the global number one provider of 
advanced semiconductor materials.

Our strategy 
To use technology leadership and scale to 
deliver the performance, cost points and 
security of supply required for mass market 
adoption of compound semiconductor 
materials.

Our delivery 
Number one provider to the wireless market 
by market share and scale. 
Clear technology leader with an unparalleled 
breadth of technology. Leading the 
advancement of new materials technologies.

10

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Our	
  competitive	
  advantage

Global	
  footprint

Security	
  of	
  supply

IQE’s	
  operations	
  span	
  the	
  US,	
  Asia	
  
and	
  Europe.	
  	
  This	
  allows	
  IQE	
  to	
  be	
  
positioned	
  close	
  to	
  its	
  customers	
  and	
  
build	
  strong	
  relationships.

Breadth	
  of	
  technology

As	
  one	
  of	
  the	
  pioneers	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  technology,	
  IQE	
  has	
  
developed	
  an	
  unparalleled	
  and	
  
comprehensive	
  breadth	
  of	
  
technology	
  and	
  advanced	
  production	
  
platforms.

Technology	
  leadership

Through	
  organic	
  development	
  and	
  
through	
  acquisition,	
  IQE	
  has	
  
established	
  clear	
  technology	
  
leadership	
  and	
  created	
  a	
  virtuous	
  
circle	
  which	
  continues	
  to	
  attract	
  the	
  
brightest	
  and	
  best	
  talent.

Cost	
  leadership

In	
  the	
  electronics	
  industry,	
  cost	
  
leadership	
  is	
  achieved	
  through	
  
advanced	
  technology	
  and	
  scale.	
  	
  IQE	
  
has	
  developed	
  leadership	
  in	
  both.

Confidence	
  in	
  a	
  secure	
  supply	
  is	
  
critical	
  to	
  the	
  supply	
  chains	
  in	
  which	
  
IQE	
  operates.	
  	
  IQE	
  offers	
  its	
  
customers	
  identical	
  supply	
  from	
  
multiple	
  locations	
  for	
  all	
  its	
  core	
  
technologies,	
  allowing	
  it	
  to	
  be	
  a	
  
primary	
  and	
  trusted	
  supplier	
  to	
  its	
  
customers.
Our	
  risk	
  mitigation	
  
strategy
IQE’s	
  strategy	
  is	
  to	
  be	
  the	
  most	
  
significant	
  supplier	
  to	
  	
  all	
  of	
  the	
  major	
  
wireless	
  chip	
  companies	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  
mitigate	
  against	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  swings	
  
in	
  market	
  share	
  between	
  the	
  chip	
  
companies.

The	
  completion	
  of	
  the	
  acquisitions	
  of	
  
the	
  former	
  RFMD	
  and	
  Kopin	
  epi	
  
businesses	
  in	
  June	
  2012	
  and	
  January	
  
2013	
  mark	
  	
  the	
  delivery	
  of	
  this	
  
strategy.

IQE’s unique 
sales proposition 
provides 
differentiation 
and competitive 
advantage

11

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Global leader
             global presence

Asia

Singapore	
  

Taiwan	
  

North	
  America

Europe

Bath,	
  UK	
  

Cardiff,	
  UK

Cardiff,	
  UK

Milton	
  Keynes,	
  UK	
  

Bethlehem,	
  PA	
  

Greensboro,	
  NC

Somerset,	
  NJ

Spokane,	
  WA

Taunton,	
  MA

12

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Recent	
  acquisitions

Solar	
  Junction	
  investment	
  and	
  exclusive	
  supply	
  agreement

In	
  February	
  2012,	
  IQE	
  announced	
  an	
  investment	
  in,	
  and	
  an	
  exclusive	
  wafer	
  supply	
  agreement	
  with	
  leading	
  edge	
  
Concentrated	
  PhotoVoltaic	
  (CPV)	
  cell	
  developer	
  and	
  manufacturer	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  Corporation.	
  The	
  investment	
  
significantly	
  accelerated	
  IQE’s	
  strategy	
  to	
  become	
  a	
  leading	
  global	
  supplier	
  of	
  CPV	
  wafers	
  for	
  the	
  solar	
  power	
  
markets.	
  

The	
  deal	
  confirmed	
  IQE	
  as	
  Solar	
  Junction’s	
  strategic	
  and	
  exclusive	
  epitaxy	
  partner,	
  a	
  move	
  that	
  has	
  enabled	
  
Solar	
  Junction	
  to	
  benefit	
  from	
  IQE’s	
  strong	
  materials	
  intellectual	
  property	
  and	
  expertise	
  in	
  high	
  volume	
  epi	
  
wafer	
  manufacturing.	
  In	
  turn,	
  	
  IQE	
  secured	
  a	
  partnership	
  for	
  developing	
  CPV	
  technology	
  with	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  
with	
  exclusive	
  access	
  to	
  the	
  company’s	
  on-­‐going	
  extensive	
  R&D	
  programme.	
  Following	
  the	
  deal,	
  IQE	
  owns	
  a	
  
9%	
  share	
  of	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  Corporation.

RF	
  Micro	
  Devices	
  epitaxy	
  division	
  acquisition	
  and	
  exclusive	
  supply	
  
agreement

In	
  June	
  2012,	
  IQE	
  acquired	
  the	
  entire	
  in-­‐house	
  Molecular	
  Beam	
  Epitaxy	
  (MBE)	
  epi-­‐wafer	
  manufacturing	
  unit	
  of	
  
RF	
  Micro	
  Devices,	
  a	
  global	
  leader	
  in	
  the	
  design	
  and	
  manufacture	
  of	
  high	
  performance	
  RF	
  components	
  and	
  
compound	
  semiconductor	
  technologies.	
  The	
  deal	
  also	
  included	
  a	
  long-­‐term	
  wafer	
  supply	
  agreement	
  for	
  
exclusive	
  provision	
  of	
  all	
  of	
  RFMD’s	
  MBE	
  wafers	
  and	
  for	
  provision	
  of	
  a	
  majority	
  of	
  RFMD’s	
  Metal	
  Organic	
  
Chemical	
  Vapour	
  Deposition	
  (MOCVD)	
  wafer	
  requirements.

The	
  acquisition	
  included	
  a	
  fully	
  furnished	
  epi	
  manufacturing	
  plant,	
  including	
  a	
  fully	
  fitted	
  clean	
  room	
  of	
  over	
  
90,000	
  sq.ft,	
  16	
  MBE	
  manufacturing	
  systems	
  and	
  equipment,	
  all	
  housed	
  in	
  a	
  135,000	
  sq.ft.	
  stand-­‐alone	
  building	
  
in	
  Greensboro,	
  North	
  Carolina.	
  The	
  16	
  operational	
  MBE	
  tools	
  will	
  be	
  partly	
  deployed	
  towards	
  servicing	
  
anticipated	
  future	
  CPV	
  solar	
  demand,	
  creating	
  a	
  powerful	
  position	
  in	
  CPV	
  market	
  growth

The	
  deal	
  involved	
  no	
  cash	
  outlay	
  for	
  the	
  transfer	
  of	
  the	
  assets,	
  resulting	
  in	
  no	
  IQE	
  shareholder	
  dilution.	
  In	
  
exchange	
  for	
  the	
  transfer	
  of	
  the	
  assets,	
  the	
  parties	
  agreed	
  to	
  a	
  long	
  term	
  wafer	
  supply	
  agreement	
  with	
  a	
  
minimum	
  purchase	
  commitment	
  of	
  $55m	
  over	
  the	
  first	
  two	
  years,	
  whereby	
  IQE	
  will	
  supply	
  all	
  MBE	
  wafer	
  
requirements	
  and	
  a	
  majority	
  of	
  RFMD’s	
  MOCVD	
  wafer	
  requirements	
  under	
  a	
  discounted	
  	
  pricing	
  arrangement.	
  

Kopin	
  acquisition
Post	
  year-­‐end,	
  in	
  January	
  2013,	
  IQE	
  acquired	
  the	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  epiwafer	
  manufacturing	
  business	
  of	
  
Kopin	
  Corporation	
  for	
  total	
  consideration	
  of	
  $75	
  million	
  in	
  cash.	
  

The	
  acquired	
  wireless	
  division	
  is	
  the	
  leading	
  global	
  manufacturer	
  of	
  heterojunction	
  bipolar	
  transistor	
  (HBT)	
  
materials	
  that	
  are	
  used	
  in	
  power	
  amplifiers,	
  a	
  key	
  wireless	
  component	
  in	
  mobile	
  devices.	
  These	
  are	
  produced	
  
using	
  MOCVD	
  epitaxial	
  wafer	
  technology.	
  	
  

The	
  acquisition	
  of	
  Kopin	
  builds	
  on	
  IQE’s	
  strategic	
  developments	
  in	
  2012	
  to	
  further	
  extend	
  IQE’s	
  leadership	
  in	
  
wireless	
  industry	
  supply	
  and	
  deliver	
  a	
  market	
  leading	
  position	
  in	
  MOCVD	
  HBTs.

The	
  transaction	
  also	
  builds	
  on	
  IQE’s	
  risk	
  mitigation	
  strategy	
  and	
  market	
  share	
  in	
  wireless,	
  adding	
  Skyworks	
  as	
  a	
  
major	
  customer	
  and	
  increasing	
  IQE’s	
  wireless	
  market	
  share.	
  Skyworks’	
  current	
  contract	
  with	
  Kopin	
  Wireless	
  
runs	
  until	
  the	
  end	
  of	
  2013	
  and	
  guarantees	
  a	
  significant	
  proportion	
  of	
  Skyworks’	
  business.

Additionally,	
  the	
  move	
  extends	
  IQE’s	
  global	
  manufacturing	
  footprint	
  with	
  the	
  addition	
  of	
  a	
  Taiwan	
  
manufacturing	
  facility,	
  providing	
  a	
  strong	
  position	
  to	
  access	
  the	
  growing	
  Asian	
  semiconductor	
  market.

13

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Scottish 
economist Adam 
Smith (1776) 
advocated 
specialisation 
as a competitive 
advantage

14

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Our	
  business	
  model

Outsourcing	
  pioneer

In	
  the	
  early	
  days	
  of	
  the	
  industrial	
  
revolution	
  it	
  became	
  absolutely	
  
necessary	
  for	
  manufacturers	
  to	
  be	
  
vertically	
  integrated	
  since	
  there	
  
were	
  no	
  alternative	
  sources	
  of	
  
specialised	
  goods	
  and	
  services.

Only	
  towards	
  the	
  middle	
  of	
  the	
  
twentieth	
  century	
  did	
  specialisation	
  
become	
  a	
  competitive	
  advantage.

However,	
  in	
  new	
  and	
  emerging	
  
technologies,	
  the	
  early	
  adopters	
  	
  
were	
  in	
  a	
  similar	
  position	
  to	
  their	
  
industrial	
  revolution	
  forefathers	
  in	
  
that	
  the	
  development	
  of	
  new	
  
processes	
  and	
  technologies	
  
required	
  the	
  early	
  pioneers	
  to	
  
establish	
  all	
  key	
  parts	
  of	
  their	
  
supply	
  chain.

Specialisation	
  within	
  
the	
  silicon	
  industry

Early	
  silicon	
  chip	
  manufacturers	
  
found	
  it	
  necessary	
  to	
  set	
  up	
  
complete	
  vertically	
  integrated	
  
supply	
  chains	
  to	
  source	
  each	
  part	
  of	
  
the	
  production	
  process	
  from	
  raw	
  
materials	
  through	
  to	
  final	
  packaged	
  
product.	
  

As	
  silicon	
  technology	
  matured,	
  the	
  
industry	
  saw	
  the	
  emergence	
  of	
  
businesses	
  specialising	
  in	
  different	
  
parts	
  of	
  the	
  process	
  to	
  the	
  extent	
  
that	
  there	
  now	
  exist	
  a	
  large	
  number	
  
of	
  fabless	
  companies	
  who	
  
outsource	
  the	
  entire	
  production	
  
process	
  to	
  large	
  specialists	
  such	
  as	
  
TSMC	
  Ltd	
  and	
  Global	
  Foundries.

Pioneering	
  
specialisation	
  within	
  the	
  
compound	
  
semiconductor	
  industry

The	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  
industry	
  shares	
  similar	
  attributes	
  
with	
  the	
  silicon	
  chip	
  industry.	
  Some	
  
of	
  the	
  processes	
  such	
  as	
  epitaxy	
  
require	
  large	
  scale	
  investment,	
  
complex	
  infrastructure	
  support	
  in	
  
the	
  form	
  of	
  cleanrooms,	
  
environmental	
  controls	
  and	
  most	
  
importantly,	
  highly	
  specialised	
  
skills	
  and	
  expertise.

In	
  1988,	
  IQE	
  became	
  the	
  first	
  
compound	
  semiconductor	
  
materials	
  company	
  to	
  recognise	
  
the	
  potential	
  value	
  in	
  offering	
  
specialised	
  outsourcing	
  of	
  
compound	
  semiconductor	
  wafers	
  
and	
  has	
  witnessed	
  an	
  increasing	
  
trend	
  towards	
  this	
  model	
  over	
  its	
  
twenty-­‐five	
  year	
  history.

Our track record
• Sales CAGR of 25% 
over 5 years
• High operational 
gearing to transform 
profitability
• Operational and 
financial resilience
•Strong position in high-
growth markets 
provide strong outlook

By	
  specialising	
  in	
  the	
  complex	
  
epitaxy	
  process,	
  IQE	
  offers	
  its	
  
customers	
  economies	
  of	
  scale,	
  
access	
  to	
  leading	
  technology	
  and	
  
the	
  ability	
  to	
  do	
  what	
  they	
  do	
  best:	
  
design	
  and	
  refine	
  their	
  products.

The	
  high	
  level	
  of	
  investment	
  means	
  
that	
  IQE’s	
  business	
  is	
  highly	
  
operationally	
  geared	
  which	
  
facilitates	
  significant	
  scope	
  for	
  
profitability	
  once	
  sales	
  contribution	
  
exceed	
  fixed	
  costs.

The	
  last	
  decade	
  has	
  demonstrated	
  
an	
  unprecedented	
  number	
  of	
  key	
  
industry	
  suppliers	
  selecting	
  
outsourcing	
  as	
  a	
  key	
  business	
  
advantage.	
  	
  

Revenues 2003 - 2012

EBITDA 2003 - 2012

90.00

67.50

45.00

22.50

0

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

20.00

10.00

0

-10.00

-20.00

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

2003

2005

2007

2009

2011

2003

2005

2007

2009

2011

15

 
 
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Adoption	
  of	
  compound	
  semiconductors	
  driven	
  by	
  several	
  “megatrends”

Wireless

Photonics

Electronics

High	
  speed	
  
connectivity

Smartphones
tablets,	
  WiFi
Infrastructure
Satellite

Active	
  optical	
  cables
Optical	
  comms
Thunderbolt

Advanced	
  silicon
SiGe,	
  GaN	
  on	
  Si
CS	
  on	
  Si

Energy	
  
efficiency

Power	
  efficient	
  
infrastructure
Smart	
  meters

CPV	
  Solar	
  energy
LED	
  lighting

GaN	
  power	
  control
Electric	
  vehicles
Power	
  switching

Lifestyle

Social	
  networking
Home	
  automation

Leisure	
  and	
  gaming
Cosmetic
Health

Leisure	
  and	
  gaming
High	
  capacity	
  memory
High	
  speed	
  processing

Safety	
  &	
  
security

Radar
Airport	
  security
RF	
  communications

Laser	
  guidance
Night	
  vision
Infrared	
  CCTV

Missile	
  detection
Guidance	
  systems

16

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Our	
  markets

Overview

Wireless

The	
  key	
  advantages	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  over	
  silicon	
  are	
  :

Accounts	
  for	
  79%	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
sales	
  in	
  2012.

We	
  segment	
  the	
  photonics	
  market	
  
into:

✦ Emitters	
  and	
  detectors

Compound	
  semiconductors	
  are	
  
much	
  more	
  efficient	
  at	
  emitting	
  
and	
  receiving	
  radio	
  waves

Compound	
  semiconductors	
  are	
  
much	
  more	
  efficient	
  at	
  emitting	
  
and	
  detecting	
  light

Compound	
  semiconductors	
  
operate	
  at	
  much	
  higher	
  speeds	
  and	
  
lower	
  power	
  consumption

It	
  is	
  these	
  advanced	
  properties	
  
which	
  determine	
  the	
  markets	
  for	
  
our	
  materials:

✦ Wireless

✦ Photonics

✦ Electronics

The	
  wireless	
  market	
  covers	
  
electronic	
  devices	
  that	
  
communicate	
  wirelessly.

This	
  includes	
  but	
  is	
  not	
  limited	
  to	
  
mobile	
  phones,	
  smartphones,	
  
mobile	
  networks,	
  WiFi,	
  smart	
  
metering,	
  satellite	
  navigation,	
  and	
  
a	
  plethora	
  of	
  connected	
  devices.

Photonics

Accounts	
  for	
  20%	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
sales	
  in	
  2012.

The	
  photonics	
  market	
  covers	
  
applications	
  that	
  either	
  emit	
  or	
  
detect	
  light.

✦ Infrared

✦ Solar	
  (CPV)

✦ Lighting

Electronics

The	
  electronics	
  market	
  combines	
  
the	
  advanced	
  properties	
  of	
  
compound	
  semiconductors	
  with	
  
the	
  low	
  cost	
  of	
  silicon.

We	
  segment	
  the	
  electronics	
  market	
  
into:

✦ Power	
  control

✦ Advanced	
  materials

Photonics
20%

Wireless
79%

IQE’s 2012 revenues by market sector

17

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Wireless

The	
  wireless	
  communications	
  
market	
  has	
  grown	
  rapidly	
  in	
  recent	
  
years	
  reflecting	
  the	
  increasing	
  
adoption	
  of	
  wireless	
  technology,	
  
coupled	
  with	
  the	
  need	
  for	
  a	
  
increased	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  content	
  to	
  support	
  
greater	
  sophistication	
  of	
  mobile	
  
devices.	
  

More	
  than	
  1.75	
  billion	
  mobile	
  
handsets	
  were	
  sold	
  in	
  2012,	
  of	
  
which	
  over	
  670	
  million	
  were	
  
smartphones	
  that	
  carry	
  
significantly	
  more	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  materials.	
  

Smartphone	
  shipments	
  are	
  
expected	
  to	
  show	
  further	
  growth	
  in	
  
the	
  coming	
  years,	
  driven	
  by	
  new	
  
features,	
  apps,	
  social	
  networking,	
  
entertainment	
  and	
  location	
  based	
  
services.

High-­‐speed	
  connectivity	
  and	
  added	
  
functionality	
  drive	
  the	
  requirement	
  
for	
  the	
  advanced	
  properties	
  offered	
  
by	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  
epiwafers.	
  The	
  global	
  roll-­‐out	
  of	
  
wireless	
  broadband	
  networks	
  such	
  
as	
  4G/LTE	
  devices	
  increasingly	
  rely	
  
on	
  higher	
  levels	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  content.

Shipments	
  of	
  smartphone	
  devices	
  
represented	
  38%	
  of	
  total	
  handset	
  
shipments	
  in	
  2012	
  compared	
  with	
  
32%	
  in	
  2011.

Globally,	
  smartphone	
  penetration	
  
is	
  estimated	
  to	
  represent	
  only	
  18%	
  
of	
  the	
  total	
  handset	
  market	
  in	
  
terms	
  of	
  subscribers,	
  indicating	
  
significant	
  growth	
  potential.

Future	
  drivers	
  for	
  smartphone	
  sales	
  
include	
  near	
  field	
  communications	
  
for	
  contactless	
  payments,	
  and	
  
augmented	
  reality	
  for	
  enhanced	
  
location	
  based	
  services.

The	
  migration	
  to	
  new	
  WiFi	
  
standards	
  is	
  another	
  major	
  driver	
  
for	
  RF	
  components.	
  

2012: total year on 
year handset 
shipments 
declined 1.75% to 
1.75b units. 
smartphone 
shipments 
increased 42% to 
671m units during 
the same period

The	
  new	
  802.11ac	
  WiFi	
  standard	
  
will	
  operate	
  at	
  5GHz	
  rather	
  than	
  	
  
the	
  2.6GHz	
  currently	
  used.	
  The	
  
higher	
  frequency	
  which	
  will	
  greatly	
  
increase	
  the	
  range	
  and	
  reliability	
  of	
  
WiFi	
  networks,	
  will	
  further	
  raise	
  the	
  
demand	
  for	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  based	
  RF	
  devices.

Wireless	
  chip	
  companies	
  are	
  
expected	
  to	
  show	
  around	
  15%	
  
CAGR	
  over	
  the	
  coming	
  years.	
  

This	
  growth	
  will	
  be	
  driven	
  by	
  the	
  
need	
  for	
  more	
  radio	
  frequency	
  
functionality	
  and	
  greater	
  
complexity	
  in	
  wireless	
  circuitry	
  but	
  
will	
  be	
  partly	
  mitigated	
  by	
  
improved	
  efficiencies	
  and	
  a	
  drive	
  
towards	
  reduced	
  component	
  
footprints.

18

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

January 2012

June 2012

January 2013

SkyWorks&

IntelliEpi&

Sumitomo&

Hitachi&Cable&

VPEC&

EpiWorks&
Soitec&

MicroLink&

Avago&
Other&

Kopin&

RFMD&

IQE

IQE

IQE

IQE’s change in wireless market share change since January 2012

Photonics

Photonics	
  represents	
  applications	
  
which	
  emit	
  and	
  detect	
  light.	
  	
  We	
  
segment	
  this	
  market	
  into	
  emitters	
  
and	
  detectors,	
  infra-­‐red,	
  solar	
  and	
  
lighting.

Emitters	
  and	
  detectors

This	
  encompasses	
  a	
  wide	
  range	
  of	
  
applications	
  including	
  optical	
  
interconnects,	
  laser	
  projectors,	
  
optical	
  storage,	
  cosmetic	
  
applications,	
  gesture	
  recognition	
  
and	
  finger	
  navigation.

Optical	
  interconnects

Higher	
  data	
  transfer	
  rates	
  
demanded	
  within	
  data	
  centres	
  as	
  
well	
  as	
  consumer	
  applications	
  such	
  
as	
  high-­‐definition	
  imaging	
  and	
  
video	
  streaming,	
  require	
  high-­‐
speed	
  data	
  transfer	
  rates	
  for	
  faster	
  
communications	
  between	
  devices.	
  

The wireless 
communications 
market continues 
to represent an 
exciting long term 
growth prospect 
for IQE due to:

• Continuing strong 
market growth for 
mobile devices

• Increased 
compound 
semiconductor 
content

• Adoption of 

higher 
specification WiFi 
networks

Optical	
  interconnects	
  offer	
  
significantly	
  higher-­‐speed	
  data	
  
transfers	
  over	
  much	
  longer	
  
distances	
  than	
  their	
  copper	
  
counterparts	
  and	
  are	
  certain	
  to	
  
replace	
  existing	
  cable	
  standards	
  
such	
  as	
  USB	
  and	
  HDMI,	
  as	
  these	
  
traditional	
  cables	
  struggle	
  to	
  meet	
  
the	
  increasing	
  demands	
  for	
  data	
  
transfer.	
  	
  

This	
  is	
  a	
  mass	
  market	
  opportunity,	
  
where	
  demand	
  for	
  USB	
  cables	
  
alone	
  is	
  around	
  three	
  billion	
  units	
  a	
  
year.	
  

Compound	
  semiconductor	
  
technology	
  that	
  enables	
  optical	
  
interconnects	
  include	
  Vertical	
  
Cavity	
  Surface	
  Emitting	
  Lasers	
  
(VCSELs).

VCSELs	
  are	
  an	
  advanced	
  laser	
  
technology	
  geared	
  to	
  mass	
  
production	
  and	
  low	
  cost.	
  

IQE	
  is	
  the	
  market	
  and	
  technology	
  
leader	
  for	
  VCSEL	
  products,	
  with	
  
world	
  record	
  data	
  speeds	
  in	
  excess	
  
of	
  40GBs	
  already	
  demonstrated.

19

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Laser	
  projectors

Gesture	
  recognition

Finger	
  navigation

Finger	
  navigation	
  is	
  closely	
  coupled	
  
with	
  gesture	
  recognition	
  in	
  terms	
  
of	
  how	
  humans	
  will	
  interface	
  with	
  
machines	
  in	
  the	
  future.	
  After	
  their	
  
emergence	
  via	
  RIM’s	
  Blackberry	
  
devices,	
  the	
  use	
  of	
  lasers	
  and	
  
optical	
  sensors	
  for	
  precise	
  control	
  
of	
  miniature	
  track-­‐pads	
  is	
  also	
  likely	
  
to	
  penetrate	
  areas	
  such	
  as	
  remote	
  
control	
  units,	
  cameras	
  and	
  other	
  
consumer	
  devices	
  over	
  the	
  coming	
  
years.

Gesture	
  recognition	
  represents	
  the	
  
ability	
  of	
  electronic	
  devices	
  to	
  
recognise	
  hand	
  and	
  body	
  gestures	
  
and	
  movements	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  control	
  
any	
  device.	
  	
  The	
  advanced	
  
properties	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  epiwafers	
  are	
  a	
  key	
  
component	
  in	
  gesture	
  recognition	
  
devices	
  which	
  made	
  their	
  debut	
  
with	
  the	
  launch	
  of	
  Microsoft’s	
  
Kinect	
  gaming	
  console.	
  

The	
  potential	
  applications	
  for	
  this	
  
technology	
  extend	
  far	
  become	
  
gaming,	
  from	
  medical	
  applications,	
  
disability	
  aids,	
  remote	
  controls,	
  to	
  
sign	
  language	
  recognition,	
  and	
  
more.	
  	
  In	
  fact,	
  the	
  use	
  of	
  this	
  
technology	
  is	
  only	
  limited	
  by	
  
human	
  imagination,	
  and	
  has	
  far	
  
reaching	
  implications	
  for	
  how	
  we	
  
will	
  interface	
  with	
  technology	
  in	
  
the	
  near	
  future.

Conventional	
  projection	
  
technologies	
  utilise	
  incandescent	
  or	
  
halogen	
  lamps	
  as	
  their	
  light	
  
sources.	
  Such	
  devices	
  are	
  power	
  
hungry,	
  physically	
  bulky,	
  have	
  
relatively	
  short	
  lifetimes	
  and	
  
require	
  focusing	
  optics	
  which	
  can	
  
limit	
  the	
  image	
  quality	
  and	
  
flexibility.	
  	
  

The	
  emergence	
  of	
  lasers	
  in	
  each	
  of	
  
the	
  primary	
  colours	
  (red,	
  green	
  and	
  
blue)	
  enables	
  a	
  low	
  cost,	
  high	
  
quality	
  laser	
  projection	
  solution	
  
which	
  can	
  be	
  miniaturized	
  and	
  does	
  
not	
  require	
  focusing	
  optics.	
  	
  This	
  
technology	
  is	
  called	
  pico	
  
projection.

Early	
  pico	
  projector	
  technologies	
  
utilise	
  LEDs	
  for	
  the	
  light	
  source	
  but	
  
the	
  next	
  generation	
  of	
  devices	
  will	
  
incorporate	
  miniature	
  laser	
  
projection	
  units.	
  

High	
  speed,	
  high	
  density	
  optical	
  
storage

The	
  commercialization	
  of	
  IQE’s	
  
gallium	
  nitride	
  (GaN)	
  photonic	
  
technology	
  will	
  also	
  provide	
  the	
  
Group	
  with	
  access	
  to	
  the	
  rapidly	
  
growing	
  market	
  for	
  high-­‐speed,	
  
high-­‐density	
  optical	
  storage	
  (Blu-­‐
ray).	
  Industry	
  analysts	
  predict	
  
growth	
  rates	
  in	
  this	
  market	
  of	
  c.	
  
55-­‐60%.

Cosmetic	
  applications

There	
  are	
  exciting	
  new	
  applications	
  
of	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  
technology	
  in	
  the	
  billion	
  dollar	
  
cosmetics	
  market.	
  	
  	
  We	
  are	
  working	
  
with	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  customers	
  to	
  
develop	
  advanced	
  laser	
  technology	
  
for	
  cosmetic	
  applications	
  such	
  as	
  
laser	
  hair	
  removal,	
  wrinkle	
  
treatment,	
  skin	
  rejuvenation,	
  acne	
  
and	
  psoriasis	
  treatments	
  to	
  name	
  
just	
  a	
  few.

20

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Infrared	
  (sensors)

Solar	
  (CPV)

IQE	
  is	
  the	
  clear	
  market	
  leader	
  in	
  
advanced	
  gallium	
  antimonide	
  and	
  
indium	
  antimonide	
  substrates	
  for	
  
use	
  in	
  a	
  range	
  of	
  infrared	
  and	
  heat	
  
sensing	
  applications.	
  

The	
  sensitivity	
  of	
  current	
  heat	
  
sensors	
  enable	
  a	
  monochrome	
  
image	
  so	
  that	
  applications	
  such	
  as	
  
night	
  vision	
  devices	
  can	
  only	
  see	
  in	
  
tones	
  of	
  green	
  and	
  black,	
  whereas	
  
the	
  new	
  antimonide	
  materials	
  
allow	
  greater	
  sensitivity	
  so	
  that	
  
different	
  shades	
  and	
  colours	
  can	
  be	
  
distinguished,	
  effectively	
  producing	
  
full	
  colour	
  night	
  vision	
  images.	
  

The	
  improved	
  sensitivity	
  is	
  useful	
  
for	
  search	
  and	
  rescue	
  operations	
  
and	
  the	
  full	
  colour	
  night	
  vision	
  
capability	
  has	
  major	
  military	
  
potential	
  in	
  terms	
  of	
  enabling	
  
effective	
  identification	
  of	
  personnel	
  
and	
  equipment	
  in	
  low	
  or	
  zero	
  
visibility	
  conditions.

IQE	
  is	
  actively	
  engaged	
  in	
  a	
  number	
  
of	
  collaborative	
  programmes	
  along	
  
with	
  leading	
  industry	
  players	
  and	
  
government	
  agencies	
  in	
  the	
  
development	
  and	
  supply	
  of	
  infrared	
  
materials	
  based	
  on	
  antimonide	
  
materials.

Solar	
  cells	
  utilising	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  (called	
  CPV	
  or	
  
Concentrated	
  PhotoVoltaics)	
  
provide	
  the	
  most	
  efficient	
  solution	
  
by	
  using	
  multiple	
  layers	
  of	
  finely	
  
tuned	
  materials	
  to	
  absorb	
  sunlight	
  
across	
  a	
  wider	
  range	
  of	
  
wavelengths.	
  	
  

As	
  a	
  result	
  the	
  efficiency	
  of	
  this	
  
material	
  is	
  already	
  in	
  excess	
  of	
  
44%,	
  with	
  a	
  roadmap	
  to	
  increase	
  
this	
  to	
  beyond	
  50%.	
  	
  

This	
  compares	
  with	
  12	
  to	
  18%	
  
efficiency	
  from	
  silicon	
  solar	
  panels,	
  
while	
  thin	
  film	
  technology	
  is	
  
typically	
  around	
  10	
  to	
  15%	
  efficient.	
  
There	
  is	
  very	
  little	
  scope	
  to	
  improve	
  
the	
  efficiency	
  of	
  these	
  technologies	
  
due	
  to	
  the	
  fundamental	
  properties	
  
of	
  the	
  materials	
  used.	
  

A	
  further	
  advantage	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  is	
  their	
  tolerance	
  
of	
  higher	
  temperatures.	
  	
  This	
  
means	
  the	
  cost	
  of	
  CPV	
  systems	
  is	
  
also	
  reduced	
  by	
  using	
  lenses	
  which	
  
intensify	
  sunlight	
  and	
  thereby	
  
reduce	
  the	
  amount	
  of	
  
semiconductor	
  required.

CPV	
  has	
  now	
  reached	
  price	
  parity	
  
with	
  fossil	
  fuels	
  and	
  other	
  
alternative	
  energy	
  sources	
  in	
  high	
  
sunlight	
  regions	
  and	
  is	
  considered	
  
to	
  be	
  at	
  an	
  inflection	
  point,	
  with	
  
industry	
  analysts	
  forecasting	
  175%	
  
compound	
  annual	
  growth	
  rates	
  for	
  
CPV	
  installations,	
  which	
  are	
  
expected	
  to	
  grow	
  to	
  over	
  1.0GW	
  of	
  
generating	
  capacity	
  by	
  2015,	
  
representing	
  an	
  epiwafer	
  market	
  
opportunity	
  of	
  over	
  $200m.	
  

Early	
  in	
  2012,	
  IQE	
  announced	
  a	
  
strategic	
  investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  
Junction	
  Corporation,	
  a	
  US	
  based	
  
CPV	
  manufacturer	
  with	
  some	
  key	
  
intellectual	
  property.	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  
Corporation	
  holds	
  the	
  world	
  record	
  
for	
  solar	
  cell	
  efficiency	
  at	
  44.5%.	
  
IQE’s	
  investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  
also	
  gives	
  the	
  Group	
  exclusive	
  long-­‐
term	
  manufacturing	
  rights	
  over	
  its	
  
IP,	
  which	
  includes	
  a	
  technology	
  
roadmap	
  to	
  design	
  solar	
  cells	
  with	
  
efficiencies	
  in	
  excess	
  of	
  50%.

21

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Solid	
  state	
  lighting	
  is	
  widely	
  viewed	
  
as	
  the	
  only	
  credible	
  solution	
  to	
  
replace	
  the	
  incandescent	
  light	
  bulb.	
  	
  
Efficient	
  energy	
  consumption	
  will	
  
remain	
  a	
  key	
  driver	
  in	
  the	
  
development	
  and	
  adoption	
  of	
  this	
  
technology,	
  but	
  the	
  critical	
  success	
  
factor	
  is	
  reducing	
  cost	
  and	
  
improving	
  the	
  ambience	
  of	
  these	
  
units.	
  	
  

High	
  quality	
  gallium	
  nitride	
  
provides	
  the	
  route	
  map	
  to	
  
achieving	
  this,	
  which	
  will	
  
revolutionise	
  residential	
  and	
  
commercial	
  lighting	
  around	
  the	
  
planet	
  over	
  the	
  coming	
  years.

Solid state lighting 
is widely viewed as 
the only credible 
solution to replace 
the incandescent 
light bulb.

High quality 
gallium nitride 
provides the route 
map to achieving 
this.

Solid	
  state	
  lighting	
  (LEDs)

A	
  high	
  performance,	
  low	
  cost,	
  
green	
  alternative	
  to	
  incandescent	
  
light	
  bulbs.

Global	
  concerns	
  about	
  climate	
  
change	
  and	
  the	
  Earth’s	
  dwindling	
  
natural	
  resources	
  continues	
  to	
  be	
  a	
  
priority	
  for	
  governments	
  
worldwide.	
  Significant	
  new	
  policies	
  
and	
  legislation	
  continue	
  to	
  be	
  
introduced	
  in	
  the	
  direction	
  of	
  
renewable	
  and	
  highly	
  efficient	
  
energy	
  devices.

Already,	
  many	
  continents	
  have	
  
introduced	
  wide-­‐ranging	
  legislation	
  
to	
  progressively	
  ban	
  incandescent	
  
lighting	
  with	
  2012	
  being	
  a	
  key	
  
milestone	
  for	
  eradicating	
  the	
  form	
  
of	
  lighting	
  altogether.	
  Alternative	
  
low	
  energy	
  lighting	
  is	
  unpopular	
  
because	
  of	
  perceptions	
  of	
  low	
  
quality	
  lighting	
  and	
  on-­‐going	
  issues	
  
with	
  heavy	
  metal	
  content	
  including	
  
mercury.

22

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Advanced	
  materials	
  

IQE	
  has	
  developed	
  a	
  powerful	
  
range	
  of	
  advanced,	
  engineered	
  
wafers	
  such	
  as	
  germanium-­‐on-­‐
insulator	
  (GeOI),	
  germanium-­‐on-­‐
silicon	
  (GeOSi)	
  and	
  silicon-­‐on-­‐
sapphire	
  (SOS),	
  which	
  offer	
  a	
  high	
  
performance	
  and	
  low	
  cost	
  solution	
  
for	
  next	
  generation	
  
microprocessors,	
  ultra-­‐high	
  speed/
high	
  density	
  flash	
  memory	
  and	
  
MEMS	
  devices	
  such	
  as	
  motion	
  
sensors.

IQE	
  has	
  established	
  a	
  powerful	
  
position	
  in	
  these	
  advanced	
  
technologies,	
  working	
  with	
  some	
  of	
  
the	
  biggest	
  names	
  in	
  the	
  industry,	
  
which	
  is	
  reflected	
  in	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  
joint	
  patents	
  awarded	
  in	
  
conjunction	
  with	
  Intel	
  for	
  the	
  
production	
  of	
  compound	
  
semiconductor	
  materials	
  on	
  silicon	
  
substrates.	
  

We	
  believe	
  that	
  the	
  intellectual	
  
property	
  that	
  we	
  are	
  developing	
  in	
  
this	
  field	
  has	
  the	
  potential	
  to	
  
revolutionise	
  the	
  semi-­‐conductor	
  
world,	
  and	
  in	
  doing	
  so	
  create	
  
significant	
  long	
  term	
  value	
  to	
  IQE	
  
stakeholders.

Electronics

Power	
  control

Gallium	
  nitride	
  (GaN)	
  is	
  a	
  
compound	
  semiconductor	
  that	
  
offers	
  a	
  diverse	
  range	
  of	
  RF,	
  
photonic	
  and	
  electronic	
  properties.

Of	
  particular	
  interest	
  is	
  the	
  
material’s	
  ability	
  to	
  cope	
  with	
  high	
  
voltages,	
  high	
  temperative,	
  and	
  
high	
  power	
  which	
  makes	
  it	
  an	
  ideal	
  
candidate	
  for	
  power	
  control	
  
systems	
  which	
  are	
  growing	
  in	
  
demand	
  driven	
  by	
  alternative	
  
energy	
  sources	
  such	
  as	
  solar,	
  wind	
  
and	
  wave	
  power,	
  and	
  also	
  the	
  
adoption	
  of	
  electrically	
  driven	
  
transportation.

It	
  is	
  estimated	
  that	
  more	
  than	
  10%	
  
of	
  all	
  electricity	
  is	
  ultimately	
  lost	
  
due	
  to	
  conversion	
  	
  inefficiencies,	
  as	
  
energy	
  is	
  switched	
  from	
  
generation,	
  to	
  grid,	
  and	
  through	
  to	
  
consumption.	
  The	
  scale	
  of	
  this	
  loss	
  
exceeds	
  the	
  world’s	
  entire	
  supply	
  of	
  
renewable	
  energy	
  generation.	
  

The	
  transformers	
  that	
  we	
  use	
  for	
  
our	
  electronic	
  devices,	
  such	
  as	
  
laptop	
  power	
  supplies,	
  provide	
  a	
  
vivid	
  example	
  of	
  this	
  phenomenon	
  
by	
  the	
  virtue	
  of	
  the	
  heat	
  energy	
  
they	
  generate	
  as	
  electricity	
  is	
  lost.

GaN	
  offers	
  performance	
  and	
  
efficiency	
  which	
  are	
  orders	
  of	
  
magnitude	
  better	
  than	
  the	
  silicon	
  
technology	
  which	
  dominates	
  
power	
  switching	
  technology	
  today.	
  	
  	
  
Indeed,	
  this	
  technology	
  has	
  the	
  
potential	
  to	
  eliminate	
  up	
  to	
  90%	
  
the	
  energy	
  lost	
  through	
  switching.

23

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Current	
  trading	
  and	
  outlook

IQE	
  is	
  now	
  the	
  clear	
  technology	
  
and	
  market	
  leader	
  in	
  the	
  wireless	
  
market,	
  with	
  an	
  estimated	
  50%	
  to	
  
60%	
  share.	
  	
  The	
  benefit	
  of	
  the	
  three	
  
key	
  deals	
  will	
  increasingly	
  be	
  
reflected	
  in	
  the	
  Group’s	
  
performance	
  going	
  forward.

The	
  Group	
  is	
  also	
  beginning	
  to	
  see	
  
the	
  rewards	
  of	
  its	
  investment	
  
programme	
  in	
  advanced	
  wireless	
  
technology	
  over	
  the	
  last	
  two	
  years	
  
and	
  in	
  initial	
  production	
  with	
  a	
  
number	
  of	
  chip	
  companies	
  on	
  
advanced	
  BiHEMT	
  technology.

As	
  anticipated,	
  the	
  Group’s	
  
photonics	
  (optoelectronics)	
  
business	
  is	
  transitioning	
  towards	
  
high	
  volume	
  applications.	
  	
  	
  IQE	
  has	
  
started	
  to	
  ship	
  advanced	
  VCSEL	
  
materials	
  for	
  optical	
  
communications	
  applications,	
  
including	
  data	
  centre	
  applications.	
  	
  
The	
  Group	
  remains	
  on	
  track	
  to	
  
transition	
  to	
  production	
  for	
  a	
  range	
  
of	
  other	
  applications,	
  including	
  
solar	
  power	
  (CPV),	
  in	
  the	
  second	
  
half	
  of	
  2013.

IQE	
  continues	
  to	
  develop	
  new	
  
products	
  at	
  the	
  leading	
  edge	
  of	
  
technology	
  such	
  as	
  compound	
  
semiconductors	
  on	
  silicon	
  
integrated	
  circuits,	
  which,	
  in	
  due	
  
course	
  will	
  revolutionise	
  the	
  
electronics	
  marketplace.	
  

The	
  focus	
  in	
  2013	
  is	
  on	
  delivery.	
  	
  
IQE	
  will	
  access	
  the	
  significant	
  
efficiencies	
  and	
  synergies	
  that	
  the	
  
three	
  deals	
  bring	
  to	
  the	
  Group	
  and	
  
leveraging	
  the	
  investment	
  in	
  
product	
  qualifications	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  
deliver	
  strong	
  organic	
  growth	
  in	
  the	
  
core	
  markets.	
  

The	
  current	
  financial	
  year	
  has	
  
started	
  well,	
  in	
  line	
  with	
  the	
  Board’s	
  
expectations,	
  with	
  the	
  momentum	
  
seen	
  in	
  the	
  second	
  half	
  of	
  2011	
  
continuing.	
  	
  Overall	
  IQE	
  is	
  well	
  
positioned	
  to	
  deliver	
  strong	
  growth	
  
in	
  the	
  current	
  year	
  and	
  beyond,	
  
based	
  on	
  its	
  premier	
  position	
  to	
  
supply	
  of	
  its	
  advanced	
  technologies	
  
in	
  growing	
  global	
  markets.

24

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Operational	
  highlights

A	
  secure	
  supply	
  provides	
  
competitive	
  advantage

Integration	
  of	
  
acquisitions

IQE’s	
  spare	
  capacity	
  and	
  multi-­‐site	
  
supply	
  gives	
  our	
  customers	
  
confidence	
  in	
  our	
  ability	
  to	
  meet	
  their	
  
growth	
  needs	
  and	
  surges	
  in	
  demand.

This	
  is	
  why	
  IQE	
  embarked	
  on	
  a	
  
capacity	
  expansion	
  programme	
  
which	
  spanned	
  2011	
  and	
  2012.	
  	
  This	
  
programme	
  was	
  successfully	
  
concluded	
  on	
  time	
  and	
  budget.

This	
  was	
  further	
  complemented	
  by	
  
the	
  spare	
  capacity	
  that	
  came	
  with	
  the	
  
acquisitions	
  of	
  the	
  ex	
  RFMD	
  and	
  ex	
  
Kopin	
  epi	
  businesses	
  in	
  June	
  2012	
  and	
  
January	
  2013.

Process	
  innovation	
  

As	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  constant	
  
improvement	
  strategy,	
  IQE	
  has	
  
demonstrated	
  process	
  innovation	
  to	
  
increase	
  production	
  efficiencies,	
  
resulting	
  in	
  both	
  throughput	
  and	
  
quality	
  improvements.	
  	
  	
  	
  This	
  
technology	
  will	
  be	
  rolled	
  out	
  across	
  
our	
  customer	
  base	
  over	
  time,	
  
providing	
  both	
  capacity	
  and	
  margin	
  
benefits.

Equipment	
  upgrades

Maintaining	
  our	
  fleet	
  of	
  high	
  spec	
  	
  
production	
  tools	
  at	
  a	
  state-­‐of-­‐the-­‐art	
  
standard	
  is	
  a	
  key	
  part	
  of	
  our	
  strategy	
  
to	
  push	
  technology	
  boundaries	
  	
  in	
  
parallel	
  with	
  achieving	
  cost	
  down	
  
targets.

We	
  have	
  made	
  continued	
  progress	
  
during	
  2012	
  in	
  our	
  programme	
  of	
  tool	
  
maintenance	
  and	
  upgrades.	
  We	
  
continue	
  to	
  innovate	
  our	
  planned	
  
maintenance	
  cycles,	
  and	
  are	
  actively	
  	
  
engaged	
  in	
  a	
  tool	
  upgrade	
  
programme	
  to	
  maintain	
  our	
  
competitive	
  edge.

IQE’s	
  impressive	
  track	
  record	
  has	
  
been	
  achieved	
  both	
  organically,	
  and	
  
by	
  acquisition.	
  	
  

In	
  doing	
  so,	
  IQE	
  has	
  demonstrated	
  a	
  
clear	
  ability	
  to	
  successfully	
  and	
  
seamlessly	
  integrate	
  newly	
  acquired	
  
businesses	
  into	
  the	
  group.

This	
  was	
  further	
  demonstrated	
  in	
  the	
  
second	
  half	
  of	
  2012,	
  with	
  the	
  
successful	
  integration	
  of	
  the	
  epi	
  
business	
  acquired	
  from	
  RFMD.	
  	
  Post	
  
acquisition	
  this	
  unit	
  has	
  seamlessly	
  
and	
  successfully	
  met	
  significant	
  levels	
  
of	
  customer	
  demand	
  over	
  and	
  above	
  
expectations.

Best	
  practice	
  sharing

The	
  challenge	
  of	
  a	
  successful	
  
integration	
  is	
  to	
  “make	
  the	
  whole	
  
greater	
  than	
  the	
  sum	
  of	
  the	
  parts”,	
  
and	
  deliver	
  synergies	
  beyond	
  just	
  the	
  
incremental	
  business	
  acquired.

This	
  is	
  where	
  IQE	
  has	
  been	
  
particularly	
  successful,	
  with	
  an	
  
impressive	
  cross	
  fertilization	
  of	
  
technologies,	
  know-­‐how	
  and	
  ideas	
  
across	
  the	
  group.	
  	
  

This	
  benefit	
  has	
  been	
  recognized	
  by	
  
our	
  customers	
  who	
  see	
  the	
  
collaboration	
  of	
  our	
  world	
  leading	
  
material	
  scientists	
  as	
  a	
  compelling	
  
benefit	
  and	
  competitive	
  advantage	
  of	
  
IQE	
  as	
  the	
  technology	
  leader	
  in	
  our	
  
industry.

Qualifications

As	
  they	
  say,	
  the	
  “proof	
  of	
  the	
  
pudding	
  is	
  in	
  the	
  eating”;	
  and	
  in	
  our	
  
industry,	
  the	
  first	
  measure	
  of	
  success	
  
is	
  in	
  the	
  qualification	
  of	
  your	
  product	
  
with	
  the	
  customer.

The market 
leadership that IQE 
has achieved 
stands as a 
testament to our 
operational 
excellence

This	
  is	
  where	
  IQE	
  has	
  enjoyed	
  
excellent	
  progress	
  over	
  the	
  course	
  of	
  
the	
  past	
  year.

Our	
  success	
  in	
  BiHEMT	
  technology	
  is	
  
a	
  particularly	
  good	
  example,	
  where	
  
IQE	
  is	
  now	
  qualified	
  and	
  in	
  
production	
  with	
  5	
  wireless	
  chip	
  
companies	
  for	
  this	
  very	
  advanced	
  
wireless	
  material.	
  	
  We	
  expect	
  sales	
  of	
  
these	
  products	
  to	
  move	
  from	
  
strength	
  to	
  strength	
  as	
  the	
  industry	
  
seeks	
  to	
  address	
  the	
  increasing	
  
demands	
  of	
  4G	
  communication.	
  	
  

In	
  the	
  opto	
  electronics	
  market	
  we	
  are	
  
seeing	
  the	
  transition	
  of	
  several	
  R&D	
  
programmes	
  into	
  production,	
  
particularly	
  with	
  VCSEL	
  technology	
  
and	
  fiber	
  optic	
  communications.	
  	
  
Specifically,	
  we	
  are	
  now	
  in	
  production	
  
with	
  multiple	
  customers	
  for	
  data	
  
centre	
  applications.

Beyond	
  this,	
  the	
  pipeline	
  remains	
  full	
  
with	
  qualifications	
  in	
  progress	
  for	
  
multiple	
  new	
  applications	
  including	
  
advanced	
  silicon	
  for	
  wireless	
  
applications,	
  advanced	
  VCSELs	
  for	
  
active	
  	
  optical	
  cables	
  	
  and	
  finger	
  
navigation.

25

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Financial	
  highlights

Revenues

EBITDA

90,000

67,500

45,000

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

22,500

0

2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

17,000

12,750

8,500

4,250

0

2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

Operating profit
(before exceptional items)

EPS
(diluted and adjusted)

e
c
n
e
p
K
U

2.00

1.50

1.00

0.50

0

2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

m
£

8,000

6,000

4,000

2,000

0

26

 
 
 
 
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Financial	
  Review

Overview

Interest

Cash	
  generated

The	
  Group	
  enjoyed	
  a	
  very	
  strong	
  
second	
  half	
  and	
  delivered	
  record	
  full	
  
year	
  sales	
  and	
  EBITDA	
  despite	
  the	
  
poor	
  first	
  quarter.	
  	
  

Revenues	
  grew	
  17%	
  year	
  on	
  year	
  
from	
  £75.3m	
  to	
  £88.0m	
  driven	
  by	
  
increased	
  sales	
  volumes.	
  	
  The	
  
acquisition	
  contributed	
  £20m	
  to	
  
sales.	
  

EBITDA

Group	
  EBITDA	
  was	
  up	
  18%	
  to	
  
£16.4m	
  (2011:	
  £14.0m).

As	
  anticipated,	
  sales	
  and	
  profits	
  
were	
  much	
  more	
  heavily	
  skewed	
  to	
  
the	
  second	
  half	
  than	
  normal,	
  
reflecting	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  the	
  
destocking	
  in	
  the	
  first	
  quarter	
  and	
  
the	
  benefit	
  of	
  the	
  RFMD	
  acquisition	
  
on	
  trading	
  in	
  H2.	
  	
  	
  Sales	
  and	
  EBITDA	
  
in	
  the	
  second	
  half	
  were	
  £53.7m	
  
(2011	
  H2:	
  £37.0m)	
  and	
  £12.2m	
  (2011	
  
H2:	
  £7.9m)	
  respectively.

Gross	
  profit

Gross	
  profit	
  increased	
  to	
  £18.5m	
  
from	
  £18.2m.	
  	
  Whilst	
  contribution	
  
margins	
  have	
  remained	
  stable,	
  the	
  
benefit	
  of	
  the	
  sales	
  growth	
  has	
  been	
  
partly	
  offset	
  by	
  higher	
  depreciation	
  
and	
  the	
  overhead	
  associated	
  with	
  
the	
  facility	
  acquired	
  from	
  RFMD.

SG&A

Selling,	
  general	
  and	
  administration	
  
expenses	
  increased	
  by	
  £0.7m	
  to	
  
£11.5m	
  (2011:	
  £10.8m).	
  	
  This	
  
increase	
  largely	
  reflects	
  one-­‐off	
  
costs	
  of	
  £0.6m	
  related	
  to	
  the	
  three	
  
transactions.

Operating	
  profit

Adjusted	
  operating	
  profit,	
  before	
  
the	
  one-­‐off	
  £0.6m	
  transaction	
  
costs,	
  increased	
  from	
  £7.4m	
  to	
  
£7.6m.

Interest	
  cost	
  of	
  £0.9m	
  (2011:	
  £0.5m)	
  
included	
  £0.3m	
  of	
  notional	
  interest	
  
relating	
  to	
  the	
  discounting	
  of	
  long	
  
term	
  balances	
  arising	
  on	
  acquisition	
  
(2011:	
  £nil).

Pre	
  tax	
  profit

Adjusted	
  pre-­‐tax	
  profit	
  was	
  up	
  5%	
  
to	
  £8.6m	
  from	
  £8.2m.	
  	
  Adjusted	
  
pretax	
  profit	
  excludes	
  non-­‐cash	
  
financing	
  charges	
  relating	
  to	
  
discounting	
  of	
  long	
  term	
  acquisition	
  
balances	
  (£0.3m),	
  exceptional	
  
charges	
  of	
  (£0.6m),	
  charges	
  relating	
  
to	
  the	
  amortisation	
  of	
  intangibles	
  
arising	
  on	
  acquisition	
  (£0.3m)	
  and	
  
share	
  based	
  payments	
  (£1.4m).	
  
Reported	
  pretax	
  profit	
  was	
  £6.1m	
  
(2011:	
  £6.9m).	
  	
  

Tax	
  credits

The	
  income	
  tax	
  credit	
  of	
  £0.5m	
  was	
  
lower	
  than	
  the	
  £1.5m	
  tax	
  credit	
  in	
  
2011,	
  which	
  included	
  a	
  £1.0m	
  non-­‐
cash	
  deferred	
  tax	
  credit.	
  Tax	
  
receipts	
  of	
  £0.5m	
  in	
  2012	
  relate	
  to	
  
R&D	
  tax	
  credits	
  (2011:	
  £0.5m).	
  The	
  
Group	
  has	
  sufficient	
  tax	
  losses	
  
available	
  to	
  shield	
  future	
  tax	
  
payable	
  of	
  up	
  to	
  £31.2m.

Earnings	
  per	
  share

Adjusted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share	
  were	
  
1.59p	
  (2011:	
  1.86p).	
  Basic	
  earnings	
  
per	
  share	
  were	
  1.16p	
  (2011:	
  1.62p).

Cash	
  generated	
  from	
  operating	
  
activities	
  was	
  £4.8m	
  (2011:	
  £10.3m).	
  
Cash	
  generated	
  from	
  operating	
  
activities	
  assuming	
  cash	
  settlement	
  
of	
  acquisition	
  of	
  £13.2m	
  (see	
  
below).

Deferred	
  consideration	
  paid	
  of	
  
£7.0m	
  (2011:	
  £1.1m)	
  primarily	
  
related	
  to	
  the	
  final	
  balances	
  for	
  the	
  
Galaxy	
  acquisition	
  in	
  2010.	
  	
  In	
  
addition,	
  the	
  Group	
  invested	
  £3.2m	
  
for	
  a	
  9%	
  equity	
  stake	
  in	
  Solar	
  
Junction.

Capital	
  expenditure

Capital	
  expenditure	
  of	
  £11.6m	
  
(2011:	
  £15.5m)	
  marked	
  the	
  
completion	
  of	
  a	
  major	
  multi-­‐year	
  
capital	
  expansion	
  programme.	
  
Capital	
  expenditure	
  will	
  now	
  return	
  
to	
  maintenance	
  levels.

Investment	
  &	
  equity

Investment	
  in	
  product	
  development	
  
of	
  £4.0m	
  (2011:	
  £3.7m)	
  primarily	
  
reflects	
  investment	
  in	
  new	
  products	
  
to	
  access	
  new	
  and	
  emerging	
  
markets.	
  

Proceeds	
  from	
  new	
  equity	
  issued	
  
was	
  £11.4m	
  (2011:	
  £0.6m).	
  This	
  
primarily	
  reflects	
  the	
  issue	
  of	
  
£10.5m	
  of	
  new	
  equity	
  to	
  finance	
  the	
  
investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  and	
  
related	
  expenditures.

Retained	
  profit

Debt

Adjusted	
  (see	
  note	
  9)	
  retained	
  profit	
  
was	
  £9.1m	
  (2011:	
  £9.7m),	
  including	
  
a	
  £4m	
  contribution	
  from	
  the	
  
acquisition.	
  Reported	
  retained	
  
profit	
  was	
  £6.6m	
  (2011:	
  8.4m).

Dividends

The	
  Board	
  will	
  not	
  be	
  
recommending	
  the	
  payment	
  of	
  a	
  
dividend.

Net	
  debt,	
  was	
  in	
  line	
  with	
  the	
  
Board’s	
  expectations	
  at	
  the	
  end	
  of	
  
December	
  2012	
  was	
  £15.5m	
  (2011:	
  
£3.9m).	
  	
  

Acquisition

See	
  business	
  combination	
  note	
  17	
  
to	
  the	
  accounts.

27

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Innovation,	
  research	
  and	
  development

Government

IQE’s	
  products	
  form	
  the	
  essential	
  
key	
  enabling	
  technologies	
  (KETs)	
  
whose	
  impact	
  cuts	
  across	
  world	
  
leading	
  industries	
  including	
  the	
  
automotive,	
  chemicals,	
  
aeronautics,	
  space,	
  health	
  and	
  
energy	
  sectors

Many	
  governments	
  worldwide	
  
have	
  recognised	
  the	
  importance	
  of	
  
KETs	
  in	
  driving	
  economic	
  growth.

The	
  importance	
  of	
  KETs	
  is	
  such	
  that	
  
they	
  will	
  form	
  a	
  significant	
  focus	
  for	
  
government	
  funded	
  programmes	
  
over	
  the	
  coming	
  years.

	
  IQE	
  maintains	
  good	
  relationships	
  
with	
  many	
  government	
  agencies	
  
and	
  departments	
  across	
  
geographies	
  in	
  which	
  it	
  operates.

IQE	
  is	
  widely	
  recognised	
  by	
  
government	
  departments	
  and	
  
agencies	
  as	
  world	
  experts	
  in	
  
advanced	
  materials	
  and	
  
representatives	
  from	
  the	
  company	
  
are	
  often	
  called	
  upon	
  to	
  provide	
  
input	
  and	
  advise	
  on	
  areas	
  of	
  
technology	
  in	
  which	
  the	
  group	
  has	
  
acknowledged	
  and	
  respected	
  
expertise.

R&D	
  activity

The	
  continuous	
  development	
  of	
  
leading	
  edge	
  materials	
  technology	
  
is	
  paramount	
  to	
  IQE’s	
  success.	
  The	
  
Group’s	
  twenty-­‐five	
  years’	
  
experience	
  combined	
  with	
  a	
  culture	
  
of	
  innovation	
  has	
  enabled	
  us	
  to	
  
develop	
  technology	
  and	
  market	
  
leadership	
  in	
  the	
  markets	
  in	
  which	
  
we	
  operate.	
  

We	
  continue	
  to	
  push	
  the	
  limits	
  of	
  
materials	
  technology,	
  constantly	
  
improving	
  the	
  quality	
  of	
  existing	
  
products	
  whilst	
  developing	
  new	
  
and	
  enhanced	
  capabilities.	
  	
  We	
  are	
  
engaged	
  in	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  research	
  
and	
  development	
  programmes	
  
with	
  customers,	
  research	
  
institutions	
  and	
  government	
  
agencies.

IQE	
  has	
  many	
  exciting	
  
development	
  activities	
  in	
  place	
  to	
  
ensure	
  continuing	
  support	
  of	
  our	
  
growing	
  customer	
  base	
  and	
  the	
  
increasing	
  range	
  of	
  commercially	
  
important	
  semiconductor	
  devices.

IQE's	
  development	
  activities	
  
include	
  internally-­‐funded,	
  
government-­‐funded,	
  customer-­‐
funded	
  and	
  third-­‐party	
  co-­‐funded	
  
projects.	
  

Development	
  programmes	
  are	
  
often	
  associated	
  with	
  next	
  
generation	
  applications	
  as	
  well	
  as	
  
process	
  improvements	
  leading	
  to	
  
greater	
  throughput,	
  higher-­‐quality	
  
products,	
  better	
  manufacturing	
  
yield,	
  increased	
  production	
  uptime	
  
and	
  new	
  product	
  development.

Whilst	
  many	
  R&D	
  programmes	
  are	
  
subject	
  to	
  non-­‐disclosure	
  
agreements	
  and	
  confidentiality,	
  
there	
  are	
  some	
  programmes	
  in	
  the	
  
public	
  domain,	
  examples	
  of	
  which	
  
include:

★ Integration	
  of	
  III-­‐V	
  with	
  Si

★ Graphene	
  for	
  RF	
  electronics

★ Sb-­‐based	
  materials

★ QD	
  VCSELs	
  (EU	
  VISIT	
  program)

★ Dilute	
  nitrides	
  for	
  lasers	
  and	
  

SWIR	
  detectors

★ Mixed	
  nitride-­‐antimonide-­‐

based	
  detectors

★ High	
  power	
  InP-­‐based	
  quantum	
  

cascade	
  lasers

A	
  list	
  of	
  technical	
  publications	
  is	
  
available	
  within	
  the	
  research	
  pages	
  
of	
  the	
  IQE	
  website	
  at	
  
www.iqep.com.

Open	
  Innovation

In	
  recognition	
  of	
  IQE’s	
  reputation	
  
for	
  quality,	
  innovation,	
  research	
  
and	
  development,	
  the	
  Group’s	
  
corporate	
  headquarters	
  in	
  Cardiff,	
  
UK,	
  has	
  been	
  selected	
  by	
  the	
  Welsh	
  
Government	
  to	
  head	
  up	
  an	
  Open	
  
Innovation	
  initiative	
  to	
  collaborate	
  
with	
  industry	
  and	
  academia	
  to	
  
identify	
  supply	
  chain	
  opportunities	
  
within	
  Wales	
  and	
  across	
  Europe.

Industry	
  events

IQE	
  actively	
  participates	
  in	
  major	
  
industry	
  events	
  and	
  frequently	
  
chairs,	
  hosts	
  and	
  presents	
  technical	
  
papers	
  at	
  international	
  
conferences.

28

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Our	
  commitment

Corporate	
  social	
  
responsibility

The	
  IQE	
  Group	
  actively	
  promotes	
  a	
  
philosophy	
  of	
  corporate	
  social	
  
responsibility	
  across	
  all	
  of	
  its	
  
operations	
  and	
  engages	
  in	
  a	
  number	
  
of	
  local,	
  national	
  and	
  international	
  
initiatives	
  working	
  with	
  a	
  wide	
  
range	
  of	
  third	
  party	
  organisations	
  
and	
  authorities	
  in	
  areas	
  such	
  as	
  
ethical	
  employment	
  policies,	
  
educational	
  and	
  community	
  work.	
  

Every	
  effort	
  will	
  be	
  made	
  by	
  all	
  
Group	
  companies	
  to	
  ensure	
  best	
  
business	
  practice	
  is	
  deployed	
  by:

Respecting	
  the	
  need	
  for	
  
confidentiality	
  across	
  our	
  global	
  
customer	
  base	
  by	
  ensuring	
  that	
  any	
  
references	
  to	
  customer's	
  names,	
  
products	
  or	
  services	
  are	
  not	
  
disclosed	
  to	
  third	
  parties	
  without	
  
the	
  customer's	
  consent;

Being	
  open	
  and	
  honest	
  about	
  our	
  
products	
  and	
  services	
  and	
  
communicating	
  with	
  customers	
  all	
  
appropriate	
  information	
  they	
  need	
  
to	
  make	
  informed	
  decisions;

Ensuring	
  that	
  any	
  issues	
  or	
  
problems	
  are	
  dealt	
  with	
  efficiently,	
  
with	
  fairness	
  and	
  in	
  a	
  timely	
  
manner;

Working	
  closely	
  with	
  customers	
  and	
  
potential	
  customers	
  to	
  help	
  us	
  
improve	
  the	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  products	
  
and	
  services	
  we	
  offer	
  them;

Ensuring	
  that	
  we	
  benchmark	
  and	
  
evaluate	
  what	
  we	
  do	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  
constantly	
  improve	
  products	
  and	
  
services	
  in	
  the	
  marketplace;

Communicating	
  with	
  all	
  
stakeholders	
  as	
  and	
  when	
  
appropriate,	
  effectively	
  and	
  
transparently	
  subject	
  to	
  ensuring	
  
confidential	
  information	
  is	
  not	
  
compromised;

Identifying	
  and	
  selecting	
  suppliers	
  
using	
  fair	
  and	
  reasonable	
  
methodologies;

Identifying	
  and	
  using	
  suppliers	
  who	
  
operate	
  to	
  ethical	
  business	
  
standards;

Identifying	
  and	
  using	
  local	
  suppliers	
  
wherever	
  possible;

Working	
  closely	
  with	
  suppliers	
  to	
  
help	
  us	
  improve	
  the	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  
products	
  and	
  services	
  we	
  offer	
  
customers	
  to	
  the	
  benefit	
  of	
  the	
  
supply	
  chain;

Ensuring	
  that	
  our	
  terms	
  and	
  
conditions	
  are	
  fair	
  and	
  reasonable;

Ensuring	
  employment	
  practices	
  
throughout	
  the	
  Group	
  are	
  fair	
  and	
  in	
  
full	
  compliance	
  with	
  employment	
  
legislation;

Working	
  with	
  and	
  supporting	
  local	
  
and	
  national	
  charities;

Encouraging	
  volunteer	
  work	
  in	
  
community	
  activities;

Supporting	
  local	
  academic	
  
establishments;	
  and

Participating	
  in	
  voluntary	
  business	
  
advisory	
  services	
  via	
  professional	
  
bodies.

Each	
  of	
  the	
  Group's	
  subsidiaries	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  communicating	
  and	
  
applying	
  group	
  policies	
  within	
  their	
  
businesses	
  taking	
  account	
  of	
  local	
  
legislation	
  and	
  potential	
  risks.

The	
  group	
  also	
  actively	
  engages	
  
with	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  industry	
  groups,	
  
educational	
  bodies	
  and	
  charities	
  to	
  
promote	
  science	
  and	
  technology	
  
and	
  to	
  help	
  contribute	
  to	
  
community	
  causes.

Each	
  of	
  the	
  Group's	
  subsidiaries	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  communicating	
  and	
  
applying	
  group	
  policies	
  within	
  their	
  
businesses	
  taking	
  account	
  of	
  local	
  
legislation	
  and	
  potential	
  risks.	
  

As	
  an	
  AIM	
  listed	
  company,	
  IQE	
  is	
  
not	
  eligible	
  to	
  participate	
  in	
  the	
  
London	
  Stock	
  Exchange	
  
FTSE4Good	
  programme,	
  but	
  
nevertheless	
  maintains	
  standards	
  
and	
  applies	
  the	
  principles	
  of	
  this	
  
index.	
  The	
  group	
  also	
  actively	
  
engages	
  with	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  industry	
  
groups,	
  educational	
  bodies	
  and	
  
charities	
  to	
  promote	
  science	
  and	
  
technology	
  and	
  to	
  help	
  contribute	
  
to	
  community	
  causes.

29

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The	
  environment	
  

IQE	
  is	
  fully	
  committed	
  to	
  creating	
  
business	
  growth	
  whilst	
  ensuring	
  
that	
  the	
  impact	
  on	
  the	
  environment	
  
is	
  minimised	
  and	
  that	
  all	
  activities	
  
are	
  conducted	
  safely	
  by	
  
appropriately	
  trained	
  and	
  qualified	
  
employees.	
  The	
  group	
  works	
  closely	
  
with	
  all	
  key	
  stakeholders	
  to	
  ensure	
  
that	
  its	
  global	
  facilities,	
  and	
  those	
  
activities	
  over	
  which	
  it	
  has	
  influence	
  
through	
  its	
  supply	
  chain,	
  operate	
  in	
  
a	
  way	
  that	
  is	
  ethical	
  and	
  in	
  
accordance	
  with	
  best	
  practice.

Policies	
  relating	
  to	
  quality	
  and	
  
environmental	
  standards	
  are	
  
available	
  on	
  the	
  company’s	
  website	
  
at	
  www.iqep.com	
  along	
  with	
  access	
  
to	
  third	
  party	
  accreditation	
  
certificates.

Quality

IQE’s	
  reputation	
  for	
  quality	
  and	
  
excellence	
  in	
  products	
  and	
  service	
  is	
  
second	
  to	
  none.	
  A	
  philosophy	
  of	
  
total	
  quality	
  is	
  integrated	
  
throughout	
  the	
  group’s	
  operations	
  
and	
  each	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
manufacturing	
  facilities	
  worldwide	
  
is	
  independently	
  accredited	
  to	
  the	
  
international	
  standard	
  for	
  Quality	
  
Management:	
  ISO9001:2008.

IQE's	
  ongoing	
  commitment	
  to	
  
provide	
  the	
  highest	
  quality	
  of	
  
service	
  ensures	
  customer	
  
satisfaction	
  covering	
  the	
  entire	
  
customer	
  relationship	
  experience,	
  
from	
  order	
  inception	
  through	
  to	
  
delivery	
  and	
  after-­‐sales	
  support.	
  

IQE's	
  quality	
  assurance	
  program	
  
includes	
  wafer	
  evaluation	
  using	
  the	
  
most	
  advanced	
  measurement	
  
techniques	
  applied	
  specifically	
  to	
  its	
  
customers'	
  structures,	
  thereby	
  
ensuring	
  consistent	
  delivery	
  of	
  the	
  
highest-­‐quality	
  products.	
  Rigorous	
  
data	
  logging	
  and	
  documentation	
  of	
  
all	
  manufacturing	
  processes	
  and	
  
procedures	
  maintain	
  a	
  system	
  of	
  full	
  
product	
  traceability.	
  IQE's	
  thorough	
  
materials	
  characterization	
  
processes	
  ensure	
  excellent	
  
repeatability	
  and	
  reproducibility.	
  

Customers	
  strongly	
  value	
  the	
  trust	
  
and	
  confidence	
  they	
  have	
  
established	
  with	
  IQE	
  as	
  a	
  "pure	
  play"	
  
supplier	
  with	
  whom	
  they	
  share	
  their	
  
most	
  confidential	
  and	
  proprietary	
  
device	
  design	
  information.	
  The	
  IQE	
  
strategy	
  is	
  to	
  consolidate	
  and	
  
maintain	
  its	
  position	
  as	
  the	
  pre-­‐
eminent	
  supplier	
  of	
  epiwafers	
  rather	
  
than	
  vertically	
  integrate	
  into	
  device	
  
or	
  component	
  manufacturing.	
  This	
  
philosophy	
  protects	
  customer	
  
interests	
  to	
  the	
  fullest	
  and	
  facilitates	
  
excellent	
  supply	
  chain	
  relationships.	
  

Employing	
  its	
  extensive	
  wafer	
  
production	
  experience,	
  IQE	
  
continually	
  maintains	
  its	
  
technological	
  leadership	
  through	
  
the	
  development	
  and	
  
implementation	
  of	
  new	
  growth	
  and	
  
characterization	
  technologies	
  and	
  
new	
  materials	
  solutions.	
  IQE	
  is	
  
actively	
  involved	
  in	
  partnerships	
  
with	
  its	
  suppliers	
  of	
  crystal	
  growth	
  
and	
  characterization	
  equipment	
  to	
  
develop	
  the	
  next	
  generations	
  of	
  
epitaxy	
  and	
  metrology	
  equipment	
  
with	
  specific	
  focus	
  on	
  increasing	
  
production	
  efficiencies,	
  reducing	
  
epiwafer	
  costs,	
  and	
  maintaining	
  its	
  
technological	
  leadership.	
  

30

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Risks	
  and	
  risk	
  management

Raw	
  materials

The	
  primary	
  raw	
  materials	
  used	
  in	
  
IQE’s	
  processes	
  are	
  not	
  scarce	
  and	
  
are	
  in	
  general	
  sourced	
  from	
  
multiple	
  continents.	
  

In	
  some	
  cases,	
  materials	
  may	
  have	
  
uses	
  in	
  multiple	
  industries	
  and	
  as	
  
such,	
  may	
  be	
  prone	
  to	
  temporary	
  
fluctuations	
  in	
  supply	
  and	
  demand	
  
where	
  there	
  are	
  surges	
  in	
  usage.

One	
  such	
  example	
  is	
  Indium	
  which	
  
is	
  in	
  relatively	
  abundant	
  supply.	
  
Indium	
  is	
  used	
  in	
  small	
  quantities	
  in	
  
the	
  manufacture	
  of	
  flat	
  panel	
  
displays.	
  A	
  sudden	
  surge	
  in	
  demand	
  
for	
  flat	
  panels	
  had	
  a	
  short	
  term	
  
impact	
  on	
  global	
  indium	
  pricing	
  but	
  
such	
  impacts	
  are	
  normally	
  short-­‐
lived	
  and	
  their	
  affect	
  on	
  IQE	
  usually	
  
negligible.	
  

Natural	
  disasters

IQE	
  operates	
  multiple	
  global	
  
manufacturing	
  facilities	
  which	
  
customers	
  see	
  as	
  key	
  mitigation	
  	
  
against	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  natural	
  
disasters.	
  

However,	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  such	
  
disasters	
  on	
  other	
  parts	
  of	
  the	
  
supply	
  chain	
  cannot	
  be	
  ruled	
  out	
  
but	
  such	
  macro-­‐economic	
  factors	
  
would	
  have	
  a	
  much	
  wider	
  impact	
  
on	
  the	
  global	
  economy.

Supply	
  chain	
  risk	
  
mitigation

IQE	
  supplies	
  many	
  different	
  
customers	
  with	
  a	
  diverse	
  range	
  of	
  
products.

The	
  wireless	
  sector	
  accounts	
  for	
  
approximately	
  80%	
  of	
  the	
  Group’s	
  
revenues.	
  Within	
  this	
  space	
  there	
  
are	
  approximately	
  twelve	
  key	
  
customers	
  who	
  in	
  turn	
  supply	
  all	
  of	
  
the	
  key	
  wireless	
  device	
  
manufacturers.

IQE	
  supplies	
  each	
  customer	
  with	
  up	
  
to	
  three	
  different	
  products	
  which	
  
are	
  then	
  further	
  sub-­‐divided	
  into	
  
several	
  different	
  part	
  numbers,	
  
each	
  with	
  different	
  specifications.	
  
The	
  numbers	
  and	
  types	
  of	
  products	
  
varies	
  over	
  time	
  as	
  new	
  products	
  
are	
  launched	
  and	
  older	
  lines	
  
become	
  obsolete.

IQE’s	
  strategy	
  has	
  to	
  ensure	
  that	
  as	
  
many	
  parts	
  and	
  products	
  are	
  
embedded	
  with	
  as	
  many	
  customers	
  
as	
  possible	
  to	
  reduce	
  the	
  risk	
  of	
  	
  
losing	
  a	
  supply	
  socket	
  should	
  a	
  
customer	
  lose	
  market	
  share.

This	
  mitigation	
  strategy	
  for	
  
wireless	
  products	
  has	
  been	
  
significantly	
  enhanced	
  with	
  the	
  
major	
  transactions	
  successfully	
  
completed	
  since	
  the	
  beginning	
  of	
  
2012.

Process	
  improvements

IQE’s	
  strategy	
  is	
  to	
  focus	
  on	
  high-­‐
growth	
  technology	
  markets	
  such	
  as	
  
the	
  wireless	
  sector	
  where	
  growth	
  in	
  	
  
smartphone	
  units	
  sold	
  is	
  
accompanied	
  by	
  greater	
  demand	
  
for	
  higher	
  performance	
  materials	
  
such	
  as	
  those	
  supplied	
  by	
  IQE.	
  

However,	
  this	
  increased	
  demand	
  
may	
  to	
  some	
  extent	
  be	
  countered	
  
by	
  improved	
  product	
  design,	
  
leading	
  to	
  more	
  performance	
  per	
  
area	
  of	
  GaAs.

Improved	
  processing	
  technologies	
  
also	
  lead	
  to	
  improved	
  process	
  
yields	
  through	
  the	
  supply	
  chain	
  
which	
  can	
  lead	
  to	
  greater	
  
efficiencies	
  per	
  dollar.	
  	
  

Alternative	
  
technologies

IQE’s	
  R&D	
  activity	
  coupled	
  with	
  
excellent	
  relationships	
  with	
  
customers,	
  academia	
  and	
  
participation	
  in	
  industry	
  
conferences,	
  coupled	
  with	
  ongoing	
  
market	
  intelligence,	
  keeps	
  the	
  
management	
  fully	
  aware	
  and	
  
appraised	
  of	
  emerging	
  
technologies.	
  

In	
  most	
  cases,	
  IQE	
  is	
  actively	
  
involved	
  in	
  the	
  development	
  of	
  the	
  
next	
  generation	
  of	
  materials.

Older	
  technologies	
  that	
  have	
  been	
  
displaced	
  by	
  IQE’s	
  materials	
  can	
  
“chip	
  away”	
  at	
  the	
  trailing	
  edge	
  of	
  
the	
  technology	
  product	
  curve,	
  but	
  
the	
  gap	
  between	
  capabilities	
  of	
  
material	
  s	
  such	
  as	
  silicon,	
  compared	
  
with	
  IQE’s	
  advanced	
  materials	
  are	
  
several	
  orders	
  of	
  magnitude	
  apart	
  
whilst	
  improvements	
  in	
  silicons	
  
capabilities	
  are	
  incremental.	
  	
  The	
  
company	
  maintains	
  a	
  close	
  
watching	
  brief	
  and	
  is	
  also	
  engaged	
  
in	
  developments	
  in	
  silicon	
  
technology.

31

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Board	
  of	
  directors

Godfrey	
  Ainsworth	
  (57)
Chairman,	
  Non-­‐Executive	
  Director,	
  
Chairman	
  of	
  the	
  Audit	
  Committee

Drew	
  Nelson	
  OBE	
  (58)
President	
  and	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  Officer

Phillip	
  Rasmussen	
  (42)
Group	
  Finance	
  Director	
  and	
  
Company	
  Secretary

Phillip	
  Rasmussen	
  qualified	
  as	
  a	
  Chartered	
  
Accountant	
  with	
  Coopers	
  and	
  Lybrand,	
  a	
  
predecessor	
  firm	
  of	
  PwC.	
  During	
  his	
  career	
  
with	
  PwC	
  he	
  spent	
  two	
  years	
  in	
  Toronto,	
  
Canada	
  and	
  gained	
  significant	
  experience	
  
of	
  working	
  with	
  and	
  advising	
  a	
  broad	
  range	
  
of	
  companies	
  in	
  a	
  variety	
  of	
  sectors,	
  
including	
  multinational	
  main	
  market	
  and	
  
AIM	
  listed	
  companies.	
  	
  Before	
  joining	
  IQE,	
  
Mr	
  Rasmussen	
  was	
  Director	
  of	
  Transaction	
  
Services	
  with	
  PwC	
  in	
  Bristol	
  and	
  worked	
  
with	
  IQE	
  on	
  two	
  major	
  acquisitions	
  during	
  
2006.	
  	
  He	
  was	
  appointed	
  to	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  
IQE	
  Plc	
  in	
  March	
  2007	
  and	
  appointed	
  as	
  
Company	
  Secretary	
  in	
  January	
  2009.

Current	
  directorships:	
  
none

Godfrey	
  Ainsworth	
  qualified	
  as	
  a	
  Chartered	
  
Accountant	
  and	
  was	
  employed	
  by	
  Coopers	
  
&	
  Lybrand	
  before	
  becoming	
  an	
  audit	
  
partner	
  and	
  then	
  corporate	
  finance	
  partner	
  
with	
  Spicer	
  &	
  Oppenheim.	
  	
  He	
  founded	
  
Gambit	
  Corporate	
  Finance	
  in	
  1992,	
  a	
  
practice	
  specialising	
  in	
  the	
  provision	
  of	
  
corporate	
  finance	
  services	
  where	
  he	
  was	
  
Managing	
  Partner	
  until	
  his	
  retirement	
  from	
  
the	
  firm	
  on	
  30	
  November	
  2009.	
  	
  He	
  has	
  
held	
  several	
  Non-­‐Executive	
  Directorship	
  
appointments,	
  including	
  assignments	
  for	
  3i	
  
plc	
  and	
  the	
  Welsh	
  Development	
  Agency.	
  	
  
He	
  has	
  provided	
  advice	
  to	
  IQE	
  (formerly	
  
EPI)	
  since	
  its	
  inception	
  and	
  was	
  appointed	
  
to	
  the	
  Board	
  in	
  1997.	
  	
  He	
  was	
  appointed	
  to	
  
the	
  Board	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  in	
  April	
  1999,	
  and	
  was	
  
appointed	
  chairman	
  in	
  February	
  2002.

Current	
  directorships:	
  
Omniport	
  Holdings	
  Limited
Seren	
  Photonics	
  Limited
Mesuro	
  Limited
Cardiff	
  Partnership	
  Fund

Drew	
  Nelson	
  has	
  over	
  30	
  years	
  experience	
  
in	
  the	
  semiconductor	
  industry	
  in	
  a	
  variety	
  
of	
  research	
  and	
  managerial	
  positions.	
  
Following	
  a	
  PhD	
  in	
  Semiconductor	
  Physics,	
  
he	
  joined	
  BT	
  Research	
  Laboratories	
  in	
  
1981,	
  leading	
  the	
  group	
  responsible	
  for	
  the	
  
development	
  of	
  advanced	
  optoelectronic	
  
devices	
  for	
  optical	
  fibre	
  communications.	
  
He	
  subsequently	
  managed	
  the	
  technology	
  
transfer	
  from	
  BT	
  to	
  Agilent	
  for	
  mass	
  
production.	
  He	
  co-­‐founded	
  EPI	
  in	
  1988	
  
(which	
  became	
  IQE	
  in	
  1999)	
  and	
  was	
  
appointed	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  Officer	
  of	
  IQE	
  
Plc	
  in	
  April	
  1999.	
  Dr	
  Nelson	
  has	
  held	
  
several	
  Non-­‐Executive	
  Directorship	
  
appointments,	
  and	
  served	
  on	
  several	
  
Government	
  and	
  Industry	
  bodies.	
  He	
  
received	
  an	
  OBE	
  in	
  2001	
  for	
  services	
  to	
  the	
  
Electronics	
  Industry.	
  He	
  is	
  currently	
  a	
  
member	
  of	
  the	
  High	
  Level	
  Group	
  
appointed	
  by	
  the	
  EC	
  to	
  oversee	
  the	
  
implementation	
  of	
  Key	
  Enabling	
  
Technologies	
  (KETs)	
  throughout	
  Europe.

Current	
  directorships:	
  
PhotonStar	
  LED	
  Group	
  plc.

32

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Simon	
  J	
  Gibson	
  OBE	
  (55)
	
  Non-­‐Executive	
  Director,	
  Chairman	
  of	
  
the	
  Remuneration	
  Committee

Howard	
  Williams	
  (58)
Operations	
  Director

David	
  Grant	
  (65)
	
  Senior	
  Independent	
  Director

Howard	
  Williams	
  has	
  held	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  
positions	
  within	
  both	
  Manufacturing	
  and	
  
Service	
  industry	
  sectors,	
  with	
  roles	
  ranging	
  
from	
  Engineering	
  Management	
  to	
  General	
  
Management.	
  He	
  was	
  a	
  member	
  of	
  the	
  
founding	
  team	
  of	
  EPI	
  in	
  1988	
  and	
  was	
  
appointed	
  Operations	
  Director	
  for	
  EPI	
  in	
  
1996.	
  	
  He	
  was	
  appointed	
  General	
  Manager	
  
of	
  IQE	
  Inc	
  in	
  2002	
  and	
  General	
  Manager	
  of	
  
IQE	
  (Europe)	
  Limited	
  in	
  2003.	
  	
  He	
  was	
  
subsequently	
  appointed	
  Chief	
  Operations	
  
Officer	
  in	
  2004	
  and	
  was	
  appointed	
  to	
  the	
  
Board	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  as	
  Operations	
  Director	
  in	
  
December	
  2004.

Current	
  directorships:	
  
none

Simon	
  is	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  of	
  Wesley	
  Clover	
  
Corporation.	
  Wesley	
  Clover	
  is	
  an	
  
investment	
  vehicle	
  and	
  holding	
  company.	
  
He	
  has	
  broad	
  management	
  experience	
  in	
  
high-­‐technology	
  industries	
  in	
  both	
  North	
  
America	
  and	
  Europe.	
  Before	
  joining	
  Wesley	
  
Clover,	
  he	
  was	
  co-­‐founder,	
  President	
  and	
  
CEO	
  of	
  Ubiquity	
  Software	
  Corporation.	
  	
  
Ubiquity	
  was	
  acquired	
  by	
  Avaya	
  Inc	
  in	
  
2007.	
  Prior	
  to	
  Ubiquity	
  he	
  held	
  senior	
  
management	
  roles	
  at	
  Newbridge	
  
Networks	
  and	
  Mitel.
He	
  is	
  the	
  Chairman	
  and	
  founder	
  of	
  the	
  
Alacrity	
  Foundation,	
  a	
  graduate	
  
entrepreneurship	
  program	
  which	
  operates	
  
in	
  the	
  UK	
  and	
  Canada.	
  The	
  Foundation	
  
provides	
  young	
  people	
  with	
  post	
  graduate	
  
education,	
  opportunity	
  alignment	
  and	
  
access	
  to	
  capital;	
  with	
  the	
  objective	
  of	
  
creating	
  a	
  new	
  companies.	
  He	
  was	
  
appointed	
  to	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  IQE	
  in	
  January	
  
2002.

Current	
  Directorships:	
  
Wesley	
  Clover	
  Wales	
  Limited	
  
Celtic	
  Manor	
  Resort	
  Limited	
  
Alacrity	
  Foundation

David	
  Grant	
  has	
  a	
  background	
  in	
  
engineering	
  and	
  technology	
  and	
  was	
  
appointed	
  to	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  in	
  
September	
  2012.	
  He	
  was	
  Vice-­‐Chancellor	
  
of	
  Cardiff	
  University	
  from	
  2001	
  to	
  2012.	
  
Previously	
  he	
  held	
  leadership	
  positions	
  in	
  a	
  
number	
  of	
  international	
  businesses	
  
including	
  United	
  Technologies	
  Corp.,	
  
Dowty	
  Group	
  plc	
  and	
  GEC	
  plc.	
  He	
  has	
  been	
  
a	
  Vice-­‐President	
  of	
  the	
  IET,	
  and	
  was	
  a	
  Vice-­‐
President	
  of	
  the	
  Royal	
  Academy	
  of	
  
Engineering	
  from	
  2007	
  to	
  2012.	
  He	
  was	
  
awarded	
  the	
  IEE's	
  Mensforth	
  Gold	
  Medal	
  in	
  
1996	
  and	
  in	
  1997	
  he	
  was	
  made	
  a	
  CBE	
  for	
  
his	
  contribution	
  to	
  the	
  UK's	
  Foresight	
  
Programme.	
  He	
  has	
  a	
  PhD	
  in	
  Engineering	
  
Science	
  from	
  the	
  University	
  of	
  Durham.

Current	
  directorships:	
  
Renishaw	
  plc
DSTl	
  	
  
STEMNET

33

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Corporate	
  governance

Although	
  not	
  required	
  to,	
  the	
  
directors	
  have	
  decided	
  to	
  provide	
  
corporate	
  governance	
  disclosures	
  
similar	
  to	
  those	
  that	
  would	
  be	
  
required	
  of	
  a	
  fully	
  listed	
  company.

The	
  Board	
  recognises	
  that	
  it	
  is	
  
accountable	
  to	
  the	
  group’s	
  
shareholders	
  for	
  the	
  standard	
  of	
  
governance	
  and	
  therefore	
  seeks	
  to	
  
maintain	
  high	
  standards	
  in	
  its	
  
management	
  of	
  the	
  affairs	
  of	
  the	
  
group,	
  seeing	
  it	
  as	
  a	
  fundamental	
  
part	
  of	
  discharging	
  its	
  stewardship	
  
responsibilities.	
  	
  Accordingly,	
  both	
  
the	
  Board	
  and	
  the	
  audit	
  committee	
  
continue	
  to	
  keep	
  under	
  review	
  the	
  
group’s	
  whole	
  system	
  of	
  internal	
  
control,	
  which	
  comprises	
  not	
  only	
  
financial	
  controls	
  but	
  also	
  
operational	
  controls,	
  compliance	
  
and	
  risk	
  management.

Throughout	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  
December	
  2012,	
  the	
  company	
  has	
  
been	
  in	
  compliance	
  with	
  the	
  Code	
  
provisions	
  set	
  out	
  in	
  the	
  UK	
  
Corporate	
  Governance	
  Code.

The	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors

The	
  management	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  
directed	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  directors,	
  
which	
  is	
  responsible	
  for	
  ensuring	
  
the	
  development	
  and	
  
implementation	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
overall	
  strategy.	
  	
  	
  The	
  Board	
  of	
  
directors	
  comprises	
  the	
  non-­‐
executive	
  Chairman	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  
Ainsworth,	
  the	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  Dr	
  A	
  
W	
  Nelson,	
  two	
  executive	
  directors	
  
and	
  two	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors.	
  	
  
There	
  is	
  a	
  clear	
  division	
  of	
  
responsibility	
  between	
  the	
  non-­‐
executive	
  Chairman,	
  who	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  the	
  running	
  of	
  the	
  
Board,	
  and	
  the	
  Chief	
  Executive,	
  
who	
  is	
  responsible	
  for	
  the	
  running	
  
of	
  the	
  group	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  
authority	
  delegated	
  by	
  the	
  Board.	
  	
  

34

This	
  ensures	
  that	
  there	
  is	
  a	
  balance	
  
of	
  power	
  and	
  authority	
  such	
  that	
  no	
  
one	
  individual	
  has	
  unfettered	
  
powers	
  of	
  decision.	
  

The	
  fees	
  of	
  the	
  non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  are	
  paid	
  in	
  cash.	
  The	
  
Board	
  considers	
  that	
  the	
  non-­‐
executive	
  directors	
  are	
  
independent	
  of	
  management	
  and	
  
free	
  from	
  any	
  business	
  or	
  other	
  
relationship	
  which	
  could	
  materially	
  
interfere	
  with	
  the	
  exercise	
  of	
  their	
  
independent	
  judgement.	
  	
  	
  The	
  
terms	
  and	
  conditions	
  of	
  
appointment	
  of	
  the	
  non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  are	
  available	
  for	
  
inspection	
  upon	
  request	
  to	
  the	
  
Company	
  Secretary.	
  	
  

Dr	
  David	
  Grant	
  is	
  recognised	
  as	
  the	
  
senior	
  independent	
  non-­‐executive	
  
director	
  to	
  whom	
  concerns	
  by	
  staff	
  
of	
  any	
  suspected	
  impropriety	
  can	
  
be	
  conveyed	
  in	
  private	
  and	
  
investigated	
  as	
  required	
  by	
  the	
  
Code	
  of	
  Best	
  Practice.	
  	
  

Under	
  the	
  Company’s	
  Articles	
  of	
  
Association	
  each	
  of	
  the	
  directors	
  is	
  
required	
  ordinarily	
  to	
  retire	
  by	
  
rotation	
  once	
  every	
  three	
  years.

The	
  Board	
  held	
  regular	
  meetings	
  
during	
  the	
  year.	
  The	
  Board	
  has	
  a	
  
formal	
  schedule	
  of	
  matters	
  referred	
  
to	
  it	
  for	
  decision,	
  which	
  includes	
  
the	
  approval	
  of	
  interim	
  and	
  annual	
  
results,	
  the	
  annual	
  budget,	
  
acquisitions	
  and	
  disposals,	
  major	
  
items	
  of	
  capital	
  expenditure,	
  share	
  
capital	
  issues,	
  governance	
  issues	
  
and	
  executive	
  appointments.	
  	
  The	
  
Board	
  is	
  provided	
  with	
  appropriate	
  
strategic	
  and	
  financial	
  information	
  
prior	
  to	
  each	
  meeting	
  together	
  
with	
  monthly	
  reports	
  to	
  enable	
  it	
  to	
  
monitor	
  the	
  performance	
  of	
  the	
  
group.	
  	
  	
  The	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  reviews	
  

the	
  performance	
  of	
  the	
  executive	
  
directors	
  on	
  an	
  annual	
  basis.	
  

All	
  directors	
  have	
  direct	
  access	
  to	
  
the	
  advice	
  and	
  services	
  of	
  the	
  
Company	
  Secretary	
  who	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  ensuring	
  that	
  Board	
  
procedures	
  are	
  followed,	
  and	
  are	
  
allowed	
  to	
  take	
  independent	
  
professional	
  advice	
  if	
  necessary	
  at	
  
the	
  company’s	
  expense.	
  

Board	
  committees

The	
  Board	
  has	
  delegated	
  specific	
  
responsibilities	
  to	
  the	
  following	
  
committees:

(a)	
  Executive	
  Committee

The	
  executive	
  committee	
  consists	
  
of	
  the	
  executive	
  directors	
  under	
  the	
  
chairmanship	
  of	
  Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson	
  and	
  
is	
  responsible	
  for	
  the	
  development	
  
of	
  strategy,	
  annual	
  budgets	
  and	
  
operating	
  plans	
  linked	
  to	
  the	
  
management	
  and	
  control	
  of	
  the	
  
day-­‐to-­‐day	
  operations	
  of	
  the	
  
group.	
  	
  The	
  executive	
  committee	
  is	
  
also	
  responsible	
  for	
  monitoring	
  key	
  
research	
  and	
  development	
  
programmes	
  and	
  for	
  ensuring	
  that	
  
the	
  Board	
  policies	
  are	
  carried	
  out	
  
on	
  a	
  group-­‐wide	
  basis.	
  

(b)	
  Audit	
  Committee

The	
  audit	
  committee	
  consists	
  of	
  
the	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors,	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  
H	
  Ainsworth,	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson	
  and	
  Dr	
  D	
  
Grant.	
  The	
  committee	
  meets	
  at	
  
least	
  twice	
  a	
  year	
  under	
  the	
  
chairmanship	
  of	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  
Ainsworth.	
  	
  

The	
  audit	
  committee	
  has	
  specific	
  
written	
  terms	
  of	
  reference	
  which	
  
deal	
  with	
  its	
  authority	
  and	
  
responsibilities	
  and	
  these	
  are	
  
available	
  for	
  inspection	
  upon	
  
request	
  to	
  the	
  Company	
  Secretary.	
  	
  	
  
Its	
  duties	
  include	
  monitoring	
  

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

internal	
  controls	
  throughout	
  the	
  
group,	
  approving	
  the	
  group’s	
  
accounting	
  policies,	
  and	
  reviewing	
  
the	
  group’s	
  interim	
  results	
  and	
  full	
  
year	
  financial	
  statements	
  before	
  
submission	
  to	
  the	
  full	
  Board.	
  	
  The	
  
audit	
  committee	
  also	
  reviews	
  and	
  
approves	
  the	
  scope	
  and	
  content	
  of	
  
the	
  group’s	
  annual	
  risk	
  assessment	
  
programme	
  and	
  the	
  annual	
  audit,	
  
and	
  monitors	
  the	
  independence	
  of	
  
the	
  external	
  auditors.	
  	
  

The	
  Group	
  has	
  an	
  Internal	
  Audit	
  
function,	
  with	
  a	
  scope	
  of	
  evaluating	
  
and	
  testing	
  the	
  group’s	
  financial	
  
control	
  procedures.	
  The	
  Internal	
  
Audit	
  function	
  reports	
  directly	
  to	
  
the	
  chairman	
  of	
  the	
  audit	
  
committee,	
  and	
  liaises	
  with	
  the	
  
external	
  auditors	
  as	
  appropriate.	
  

The	
  Finance	
  Director,	
  other	
  
financial	
  management	
  and	
  the	
  
external	
  auditors	
  attend	
  meetings	
  
of	
  the	
  audit	
  committee	
  by	
  
invitation.	
  	
  The	
  committee	
  also	
  
holds	
  separate	
  meetings	
  with	
  the	
  
external	
  auditors,	
  as	
  appropriate.

(c)	
  Remuneration	
  and	
  Nominations	
  
Committees

The	
  remuneration	
  committee	
  
consists	
  of	
  the	
  non-­‐executive	
  
directors,	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson,	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  
Ainsworth	
  and	
  Dr	
  D	
  Grant.	
  The	
  
committee	
  meets	
  at	
  least	
  twice	
  a	
  
year	
  under	
  the	
  chairmanship	
  of	
  S	
  J	
  
Gibson.	
  	
  The	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  
attends	
  meetings	
  of	
  the	
  
remuneration	
  committee	
  by	
  
invitation	
  to	
  respond	
  to	
  questions	
  
raised	
  by	
  the	
  committee,	
  but	
  he	
  is	
  
excluded	
  from	
  any	
  matter	
  
concerning	
  the	
  details	
  of	
  his	
  own	
  
remuneration.

The	
  remuneration	
  committee	
  has	
  
specific	
  terms	
  of	
  reference	
  which	
  
deal	
  with	
  its	
  authority	
  and	
  duties	
  
and	
  these	
  are	
  available	
  for	
  
inspection	
  upon	
  request	
  to	
  the	
  
Company	
  Secretary.	
  	
  

The	
  remuneration	
  committee	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  setting	
  salaries,	
  
incentives	
  and	
  other	
  benefit	
  
arrangements	
  of	
  executive	
  
directors	
  and	
  senior	
  executives	
  and	
  

overseeing	
  the	
  group’s	
  employee	
  
share	
  schemes.	
  	
  The	
  group's	
  policy	
  
on	
  directors’	
  remuneration	
  has	
  
been	
  in	
  line	
  with	
  the	
  Code	
  
provisions	
  throughout	
  the	
  year,	
  full	
  
details	
  of	
  which	
  are	
  given	
  in	
  the	
  
remuneration	
  report.	
  	
  Members	
  of	
  
the	
  remuneration	
  committee	
  do	
  
not	
  participate	
  in	
  decisions	
  
concerning	
  their	
  own	
  
remuneration.	
  	
  	
  

The	
  Board	
  has	
  not	
  established	
  a	
  
separate	
  nominations	
  committee	
  
and	
  has	
  delegated	
  responsibility	
  for	
  
nominations	
  to	
  the	
  remuneration	
  
committee.	
  	
  There	
  are	
  currently	
  no	
  
plans	
  for	
  further	
  appointments	
  to	
  
the	
  Board.

Attendance	
  at	
  meetings

The	
  number	
  of	
  meetings	
  held	
  
during	
  2012	
  by	
  the	
  Board,	
  the	
  audit	
  
committee	
  and	
  the	
  remuneration	
  
committee	
  are	
  as	
  shown	
  below.	
  	
  
The	
  number	
  of	
  meetings	
  attended	
  
by	
  the	
  executive	
  and	
  non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  is	
  also	
  shown	
  below:

Number	
  of	
  meetings	
  held	
  in	
  2012

Number	
  of	
  meetings	
  attended	
  in	
  2012:

Executive
Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson
P	
  J	
  Rasmussen
Dr	
  H	
  R	
  Williams
Mr	
  A	
  G	
  Meldrum
Non-­‐executive
Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth
S	
  J	
  Gibson
Dr	
  D	
  Grant

Board

Audit	
  Committee

7

6
7
6
4

7
6
3

4

-­‐
4
-­‐
-­‐

4
4
-­‐

Remuneration	
  
Committee
2

* Dr	
  D	
  Grant	
  attended	
  all	
  meetings	
  following	
  his	
  appointment	
  on	
  the	
  18	
  September	
  2012.

In	
  addition	
  to	
  the	
  formal	
  meetings	
  listed	
  above,	
  there	
  were	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  meetings	
  conducted	
  by	
  telephone	
  and	
  
electronic	
  media	
  for	
  circumstances	
  requiring	
  Board,	
  Audit	
  Committee	
  or	
  Remuneration	
  Committee	
  approvals.

2
-­‐
-­‐
-­‐

2
2
-­‐

35

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Internal	
  control

The	
  Board	
  acknowledges	
  its	
  
responsibility	
  for	
  the	
  group’s	
  
system	
  of	
  internal	
  control,	
  the	
  
effectiveness	
  of	
  which	
  has	
  been	
  
reviewed	
  by	
  the	
  audit	
  committee	
  
during	
  the	
  year	
  and	
  reported	
  on	
  to	
  
the	
  Board.	
  	
  The	
  review	
  has	
  taken	
  
account	
  of	
  any	
  material	
  
developments	
  up	
  to	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  the	
  
signing	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  statements.

The	
  processes	
  to	
  identify	
  and	
  
manage	
  key	
  risks	
  to	
  the	
  success	
  of	
  
the	
  group	
  are	
  an	
  integral	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  
internal	
  control	
  environment.	
  Such	
  
processes	
  are	
  on-­‐going,	
  are	
  
regularly	
  reviewed	
  and	
  improved	
  as	
  
necessary,	
  and	
  are	
  in	
  accordance	
  
with	
  the	
  internal	
  control	
  guidelines	
  
for	
  directors	
  in	
  the	
  UK	
  Corporate	
  
Governance	
  Code.	
  	
  They	
  include	
  
strategic	
  planning,	
  the	
  
appointment	
  of	
  senior	
  executives,	
  
the	
  monitoring	
  on	
  a	
  regular	
  basis	
  of	
  
performance,	
  control	
  of	
  capital	
  
expenditure	
  and	
  significant	
  
revenue	
  investment,	
  and	
  the	
  
setting	
  of	
  high	
  standards	
  for	
  
health,	
  safety	
  and	
  environmental	
  
performance.	
  	
  These	
  processes	
  
have	
  been	
  in	
  place	
  throughout	
  the	
  
financial	
  year	
  and	
  up	
  to	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  
approval	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  
statements.

The	
  effectiveness	
  of	
  the	
  control	
  
systems	
  and	
  procedures	
  is	
  
monitored	
  regularly	
  through	
  
management	
  self-­‐assessment	
  and	
  
review	
  by	
  internal	
  audit.	
  	
  	
  In	
  
addition,	
  recognition	
  is	
  given	
  to	
  the	
  
external	
  audit	
  findings,	
  which	
  

inform	
  the	
  audit	
  committee’s	
  views	
  
of	
  areas	
  of	
  increased	
  risk.

the	
  reporting	
  of	
  any	
  variances	
  in	
  a	
  
timely	
  manner	
  to	
  the	
  Board;

The	
  system	
  of	
  internal	
  control	
  
comprises	
  those	
  controls	
  
established	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  provide	
  
assurance	
  that	
  the	
  assets	
  of	
  the	
  
group	
  are	
  safeguarded	
  against	
  
unauthorised	
  use	
  or	
  disposal	
  and	
  to	
  
ensure	
  the	
  maintenance	
  of	
  proper	
  
accounting	
  records	
  and	
  the	
  
reliability	
  of	
  financial	
  information	
  
used	
  within	
  the	
  business	
  or	
  for	
  
publication.	
  Any	
  system	
  of	
  internal	
  
control	
  can	
  only	
  provide	
  
reasonable,	
  but	
  not	
  absolute,	
  
assurance	
  against	
  material	
  
misstatement	
  or	
  loss,	
  as	
  it	
  is	
  
designed	
  to	
  manage	
  rather	
  than	
  to	
  
eliminate	
  the	
  risk	
  of	
  failing	
  to	
  
achieve	
  the	
  business	
  objectives	
  of	
  
the	
  group.

The	
  key	
  procedures	
  that	
  the	
  
directors	
  have	
  established	
  with	
  a	
  
view	
  to	
  providing	
  effective	
  internal	
  
control	
  are	
  as	
  follows:

a	
  clearly	
  defined	
  organisational	
  
structure	
  and	
  limits	
  of	
  authority;

corporate	
  policies	
  and	
  procedures	
  
for	
  financial	
  reporting	
  and	
  control,	
  
project	
  appraisal,	
  human	
  resources,	
  
quality	
  control,	
  health	
  and	
  safety,	
  
information	
  security	
  and	
  corporate	
  
governance;

the	
  preparation	
  of	
  annual	
  budgets	
  
and	
  regular	
  forecasts	
  which	
  require	
  
approval	
  from	
  both	
  the	
  group	
  
executive	
  committee	
  and	
  the	
  
Board;

the	
  monitoring	
  of	
  performance	
  
against	
  budget	
  and	
  forecasts	
  and	
  

regular	
  review	
  and	
  self-­‐assessment	
  
of	
  the	
  risks	
  to	
  which	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  
exposed,	
  taking	
  steps	
  to	
  monitor	
  
and	
  mitigate	
  these	
  wherever	
  
possible	
  including,	
  where	
  
appropriate,	
  taking	
  out	
  insurance	
  
cover;	
  and

approval	
  by	
  the	
  audit	
  committee	
  of	
  
audit	
  plans	
  and,	
  on	
  behalf	
  of	
  the	
  
Board,	
  receipt	
  of	
  reports	
  on	
  the	
  
group’s	
  accounting	
  and	
  financial	
  
reporting	
  practices	
  and	
  its	
  internal	
  
controls	
  together	
  with	
  reports	
  from	
  
the	
  external	
  auditors	
  as	
  part	
  of	
  
their	
  normal	
  audit	
  work.

an	
  internal	
  audit	
  function,	
  which	
  is	
  
mandated	
  to	
  evaluate	
  and	
  test	
  the	
  
Group’s	
  financial	
  control	
  
procedures,	
  reporting	
  directly	
  to	
  
the	
  chairman	
  of	
  the	
  audit	
  
committee.

Shareholder	
  relations

The	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  and	
  the	
  
Finance	
  Director	
  meet	
  on	
  a	
  regular	
  
basis	
  with	
  representatives	
  of	
  
institutional	
  shareholders	
  to	
  
discuss	
  their	
  views	
  and	
  to	
  ensure	
  
that	
  the	
  strategies	
  and	
  objectives	
  
of	
  the	
  group	
  are	
  well	
  understood.	
  	
  
The	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  keeps	
  the	
  
Board	
  fully	
  informed	
  of	
  the	
  views	
  of	
  
institutional	
  shareholders.	
  	
  Issues	
  
discussed	
  with	
  institutional	
  
shareholders	
  include	
  the	
  group’s	
  
performance	
  and	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  any	
  
major	
  transactions.	
  The	
  Chairman	
  
has	
  met	
  with	
  individual	
  
shareholders	
  on	
  an	
  ad	
  hoc	
  basis.	
  	
  

36

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The	
  company	
  also	
  has	
  a	
  manager	
  
responsible	
  for	
  investor	
  relations	
  
and	
  operates	
  a	
  web	
  site,	
  which	
  
provides	
  details	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
facilities	
  and	
  products	
  and	
  includes	
  
a	
  separate	
  investor	
  relations	
  
section	
  on	
  which	
  financial	
  data	
  and	
  
other	
  significant	
  announcements	
  
are	
  published.	
  The	
  web	
  site	
  can	
  be	
  
found	
  at	
  www.iqep.com.	
  	
  The	
  
group’s	
  annual	
  report	
  and	
  financial	
  
statements,	
  interim	
  reports	
  and	
  
other	
  documentation	
  is	
  available	
  
online	
  and	
  by	
  mail	
  where	
  
requested.	
  

The	
  Annual	
  General	
  Meeting	
  allows	
  
shareholders	
  to	
  raise	
  questions	
  
with	
  the	
  Board,	
  although	
  
shareholder	
  enquiries	
  and	
  
questions	
  are	
  also	
  addressed	
  
throughout	
  the	
  year.	
  In	
  accordance	
  
with	
  the	
  recommendation	
  of	
  the	
  
Hampel	
  Code,	
  the	
  company	
  will	
  
advise	
  shareholders	
  attending	
  the	
  

Annual	
  General	
  Meeting	
  of	
  the	
  
number	
  of	
  proxy	
  votes	
  lodged	
  for	
  
each	
  resolution	
  in	
  the	
  categories	
  
‘For’	
  and	
  ‘Against’,	
  together	
  with	
  
the	
  numbers	
  ‘at	
  the	
  Chairman’s	
  
discretion’	
  and	
  abstentions.	
  	
  These	
  
will	
  be	
  advised	
  after	
  the	
  resolutions	
  
have	
  been	
  dealt	
  with	
  on	
  a	
  show	
  of	
  
hands.

Audit	
  and	
  related	
  
services

The	
  Board	
  is	
  aware	
  of	
  the	
  
importance	
  of	
  maintaining	
  the	
  
independence	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  
auditors,	
  and	
  does	
  not	
  contract	
  for	
  
additional	
  services	
  from	
  them	
  
which	
  would	
  compromise	
  their	
  
audit	
  independence.	
  	
  Additional	
  
services	
  are	
  also	
  subject	
  to	
  
appropriate	
  market	
  testing.	
  

The	
  Audit	
  Committee	
  keeps	
  under	
  
review	
  the	
  nature	
  and	
  extent	
  of	
  
audit	
  and	
  non-­‐audit	
  services	
  
provided	
  to	
  the	
  group	
  by	
  the	
  
auditors	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  a	
  policy	
  
which	
  it	
  established	
  in	
  2004.	
  	
  Under	
  
this	
  policy,	
  the	
  award	
  to	
  the	
  group’s	
  
auditors	
  of	
  audit-­‐related	
  services,	
  
tax	
  consulting	
  services	
  or	
  other	
  
non-­‐audit	
  related	
  services	
  in	
  excess	
  
of	
  £10,000	
  must	
  first	
  be	
  approved	
  
by	
  the	
  Chairman	
  of	
  the	
  Audit	
  
Committee.	
  	
  In	
  addition,	
  the	
  
group’s	
  auditors	
  will	
  be	
  required	
  to	
  
make	
  a	
  formal	
  report	
  to	
  the	
  Audit	
  
Committee	
  annually	
  on	
  the	
  
safeguards	
  that	
  are	
  in	
  place	
  to	
  
maintain	
  their	
  independence	
  and	
  
the	
  internal	
  safeguards	
  in	
  place	
  to	
  
ensure	
  their	
  objectivity.

The	
  nature	
  of	
  the	
  services	
  provided	
  
by	
  the	
  auditors	
  and	
  the	
  amounts	
  
paid	
  to	
  them	
  are	
  as	
  detailed	
  below:

Total	
  2012
£‘000

Total	
  2011
£‘000

PricewaterhouseCoopers	
  LLP	
  (group	
  auditors)	
  
Fees	
   payable	
  to	
   company’s	
   auditor	
   and	
   its	
  associates	
   for	
   the	
   audit	
   of	
  

parent	
  company	
  and	
  consolidated	
  financial	
  statements
Fees	
  payable	
  to	
  company’s	
  auditor	
  and	
  its	
  associates	
  for	
  other	
  services:
-­‐	
  The	
  audit	
  of	
  company’s	
  subsidiaries
-­‐	
  Audit-­‐related	
  assurance	
  services
-­‐	
  Due	
  diligence
-­‐	
  Tax	
  compliance	
  service

Ernst	
  and	
  Young	
  (auditors	
  of	
  MBE	
  Technology	
  Pte	
  Limited)
-­‐	
  Subsidiary	
  company’s	
  audit
-­‐	
  Tax	
  services

Total

18

67
15
53
-­‐

18
7

178

18

65
5
-­‐
-­‐

15
10

113

37

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Directors’	
  report

Dividends

The	
  directors	
  do	
  not	
  recommend	
  
the	
  payment	
  of	
  a	
  dividend	
  (2011:	
  
£nil).

Directors

The	
  directors	
  in	
  office	
  at	
  31	
  
December	
  2012	
  and	
  throughout	
  the	
  
year	
  and	
  their	
  beneficial	
  interests	
  in	
  
the	
  company’s	
  issued	
  ordinary	
  
share	
  capital	
  and	
  share	
  options	
  are	
  
set	
  out	
  in	
  the	
  remuneration	
  report	
  
on	
  page	
  42.

Substantial	
  interests	
  in	
  
shares

As	
  at	
  15	
  March	
  2013,	
  the	
  company	
  
had	
  been	
  notified	
  pursuant	
  to	
  the	
  
Companies	
  Act	
  of	
  the	
  following	
  
substantial	
  interests	
  in	
  the	
  shares	
  of	
  
the	
  company	
  as	
  defined	
  by	
  the	
  
Listing	
  Rules	
  in	
  addition	
  to	
  those	
  
disclosed	
  for	
  the	
  directors:

Research	
  and	
  
development

The	
  group	
  incurred	
  costs	
  in	
  respect	
  
of	
  research	
  and	
  development	
  
during	
  the	
  year	
  of	
  £4,185,000	
  (2011:	
  
£3,773,000)	
  of	
  which	
  £4,042,000	
  
(2011:	
  £3,666,000)	
  has	
  been	
  
capitalised	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  IAS	
  
38	
  (“Intangible	
  assets”).	
  	
  The	
  
remaining	
  research	
  and	
  
development	
  costs	
  totalling	
  
£143,000	
  (2011:	
  £107,000)	
  have	
  
been	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  income	
  
statement.

Payment	
  terms

The	
  group	
  seeks	
  to	
  agree	
  
favourable	
  credit	
  terms	
  with	
  its	
  
suppliers	
  where	
  possible,	
  and	
  
adhere	
  to	
  the	
  agreed	
  terms.	
  The	
  
group’s	
  average	
  number	
  of	
  days’	
  
purchases	
  outstanding	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  
trade	
  creditors	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  
2012	
  was	
  85	
  days	
  (2011:	
  82	
  days).

AXA	
  Framlington	
  Investment	
  Management	
  

....................

9.33%

T	
  Rowe	
  Price	
  Inc	
  	
  

.............................................................

8.84%

Blackrock	
  Investment	
  Management	
  

...............................

6.42%

	
  Four	
  Capital	
  Partners	
  

......................................................

4.94%

	
  Nelson	
  A	
  W	
  Dr	
  

.................................................................

4.62%

	
  Herald	
  Investment	
  Management	
  Limited	
  

.......................

4.40%

Barclays	
  Stock	
  Brokers	
  Limited	
  

.......................................

3.84%

M&G	
  Investment	
  Management	
  

.......................................

3.27%

Shareholder analysis by Argus Vickers

The	
  directors	
  present	
  their	
  annual	
  
report	
  and	
  the	
  audited	
  financial	
  
statements	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  
31	
  December	
  2012.

Activities

The	
  principal	
  activity	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  
during	
  the	
  year	
  was	
  the	
  
development,	
  manufacture	
  and	
  
sale	
  of	
  advanced	
  semiconductor	
  
materials.	
  	
  The	
  principal	
  activity	
  of	
  
the	
  company	
  is	
  that	
  of	
  a	
  holding	
  
company	
  for	
  the	
  group,	
  the	
  
provision	
  of	
  services	
  to	
  subsidiary	
  
companies,	
  and	
  the	
  research,	
  
development	
  and	
  provision	
  of	
  
engineering	
  consultancy	
  services	
  to	
  
the	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  
industry.

Business	
  review

A	
  review	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  trading	
  
during	
  the	
  year	
  and	
  its	
  position	
  at	
  
the	
  year	
  end	
  is	
  provided	
  in	
  the	
  Chief	
  
Executive’s	
  review.	
  	
  The	
  review	
  
includes	
  key	
  performance	
  
indicators	
  as	
  detailed	
  in	
  the	
  Five	
  
Year	
  Financial	
  Summary.	
  The	
  
principal	
  risks	
  and	
  uncertainties	
  
facing	
  the	
  group	
  are	
  set	
  out	
  on	
  
page	
  39.	
  

a) Non	
  financial	
  KPIs	
  are	
  

commercially	
  sensitive	
  and	
  are	
  
therefore	
  not	
  disclosed

b) The	
  outlook	
  for	
  the	
  Group	
  is	
  set	
  

out	
  on	
  page	
  24.

c) During	
  the	
  year	
  and	
  post	
  year	
  
end	
  the	
  Group	
  completed	
  a	
  
number	
  of	
  transactions.	
  Details	
  
of	
  these	
  transactions	
  are	
  
disclosed	
  in	
  the	
  business	
  
combination	
  note	
  17	
  and	
  the	
  post	
  
balance	
  sheet	
  events	
  note	
  25.	
  	
  

38

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Employment	
  policies

It	
  is	
  the	
  group’s	
  policy	
  that	
  there	
  
should	
  be	
  no	
  discrimination	
  in	
  
considering	
  applications	
  for	
  
employment	
  including	
  those	
  from	
  
disabled	
  persons.	
  	
  All	
  employees,	
  
including	
  the	
  disabled,	
  are	
  given	
  
equal	
  opportunities	
  in	
  terms	
  of	
  
career	
  development	
  and	
  
promotion.	
  	
  Appropriate	
  training	
  is	
  
arranged	
  for	
  disabled	
  persons,	
  
including	
  retraining	
  for	
  alternative	
  
work	
  of	
  employees	
  who	
  become	
  
disabled,	
  to	
  promote	
  their	
  career	
  
development	
  within	
  the	
  
organisation.	
  	
  	
  

The	
  group	
  remains	
  committed	
  to	
  
its	
  policy	
  of	
  keeping	
  employees	
  
fully	
  informed	
  about	
  all	
  matters	
  
which	
  concern	
  them.	
  	
  Formal	
  
communications	
  are	
  used	
  to	
  
achieve	
  this	
  objective,	
  including	
  
intranet,	
  e-­‐mail	
  and	
  notice	
  board	
  
announcements.	
  	
  Employee	
  
involvement	
  takes	
  different	
  forms	
  
in	
  each	
  subsidiary,	
  ranging	
  from	
  
formal	
  committee	
  meetings	
  to	
  less	
  
formal	
  discussion	
  groups.	
  	
  Schemes	
  
have	
  been	
  implemented	
  to	
  ensure	
  
that	
  employees	
  are	
  properly	
  
rewarded	
  for	
  performance	
  and	
  
loyalty.

Going	
  concern

The	
  directors,	
  after	
  making	
  
enquiries,	
  have	
  considered	
  the	
  
future	
  prospects	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  and	
  
have	
  a	
  reasonable	
  expectation	
  that	
  
it	
  will	
  have	
  adequate	
  resources	
  to	
  
continue	
  operating	
  for	
  the	
  
foreseeable	
  future	
  and	
  therefore	
  
the	
  going	
  concern	
  basis	
  has	
  been	
  
adopted	
  in	
  preparing	
  these	
  
financial	
  statements.

Principal	
  risks	
  and	
  
uncertainties

The	
  Board	
  considers	
  that	
  the	
  
principal	
  risks	
  and	
  uncertainties	
  
facing	
  the	
  group	
  are:

Competition

IQE’s	
  business	
  model	
  involves	
  
building	
  close	
  working	
  
relationships	
  with	
  its	
  customers	
  
and	
  often	
  involves	
  forming	
  
multilevel	
  partnerships	
  from	
  the	
  
product	
  design	
  stages	
  through	
  to	
  
pilot	
  and	
  volume	
  production.	
  Such	
  
arrangements	
  can	
  lead	
  to	
  long	
  
qualification	
  timescales	
  but	
  once	
  a	
  
product	
  range	
  and	
  relationship	
  is	
  
established,	
  it	
  can	
  also	
  create	
  
significant	
  barriers	
  to	
  entry	
  for	
  
competitors.

In	
  some	
  cases,	
  customers	
  seek	
  
second	
  source	
  supply	
  
arrangements	
  to	
  meet	
  their	
  own	
  
business	
  continuity	
  planning	
  
policies.	
  As	
  such,	
  there	
  is	
  a	
  risk	
  that	
  
market	
  share	
  may	
  be	
  eroded.	
  The	
  
Board	
  believes	
  that	
  IQE’s	
  strategy	
  
to	
  provide	
  multiple	
  site	
  capabilities	
  
for	
  all	
  leading	
  product	
  lines	
  
provides	
  an	
  effective	
  mitigation	
  
against	
  this	
  risk.	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  

Technological	
  change

Any	
  technology	
  based	
  company	
  
faces	
  a	
  threat	
  from	
  technology	
  
change	
  that	
  has	
  not	
  been	
  
anticipated.	
  IQE	
  actively	
  engages	
  
with	
  customers,	
  educational	
  
institutions	
  and	
  government	
  
agencies	
  on	
  a	
  range	
  of	
  research	
  and	
  
development	
  (R&D)	
  programmes.	
  
The	
  company’s	
  involvement	
  in	
  R&D	
  
activities	
  coupled	
  with	
  its	
  broad	
  
range	
  of	
  products	
  and	
  process	
  
technologies	
  helps	
  ensure	
  a	
  
forward	
  looking	
  approach	
  that	
  

positions	
  IQE	
  as	
  a	
  driver	
  of	
  
technological	
  change.	
  

Supply	
  chain

Changes	
  in	
  the	
  supply	
  chain	
  such	
  as	
  
scarcity	
  of	
  key	
  raw	
  materials	
  could	
  
impact	
  the	
  business.	
  IQE	
  builds	
  
close	
  relationships	
  with	
  its	
  key	
  
suppliers	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  keep	
  well	
  
informed	
  about	
  potential	
  supply	
  
issues.	
  The	
  raw	
  materials	
  which	
  
sustain	
  IQE’s	
  products	
  are	
  not	
  
scarce	
  resources.

Retention	
  of	
  key	
  employees

The	
  Board	
  recognises	
  that	
  the	
  
retention	
  and	
  development	
  of	
  its	
  
workforce	
  is	
  critical	
  to	
  its	
  long	
  term	
  
success	
  as	
  a	
  leading	
  technology	
  
group.	
  IQE’s	
  people	
  are	
  the	
  heart	
  of	
  
the	
  business	
  and	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  
promote	
  the	
  development	
  and	
  
retention	
  of	
  its	
  staff	
  IQE	
  offers	
  
career	
  progression,	
  personal	
  
development	
  and	
  a	
  range	
  of	
  
benefits	
  and	
  incentives	
  to	
  its	
  staff.	
  
This	
  is	
  reflected	
  in	
  low	
  staff	
  
turnover,	
  with	
  many	
  employees	
  
who	
  have	
  been	
  with	
  the	
  company	
  
since	
  it	
  was	
  formed	
  over	
  twenty	
  
years	
  ago.	
  

In	
  addition,	
  IQE	
  operates	
  a	
  highly	
  
effective,	
  robust,	
  and	
  fully	
  
documented	
  quality	
  management	
  
system	
  across	
  all	
  of	
  its	
  operations.	
  
These	
  systems	
  ensure	
  that	
  all	
  key	
  
data	
  and	
  procedures	
  are	
  fully	
  
documented,	
  reflecting	
  IQE’s	
  
“learning	
  organisation”	
  philosophy.	
  
These	
  rigorous	
  systems	
  provide	
  
IQE	
  and	
  its	
  customers	
  with	
  a	
  high	
  
level	
  of	
  confidence	
  in	
  terms	
  of	
  
process	
  reproducibility	
  and	
  product	
  
traceability,	
  and	
  minimise	
  the	
  
potential	
  impact	
  of	
  losing	
  key	
  
personnel.	
  	
  

39

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Treasury

IQE	
  operates	
  a	
  central	
  treasury	
  
which	
  acts	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  
specific	
  board	
  policies.	
  Speculative	
  
transactions	
  are	
  not	
  permitted.	
  	
  	
  

Interest	
  rate	
  risk

The	
  Board	
  is	
  aware	
  of	
  the	
  risks	
  
associated	
  with	
  changes	
  in	
  interest	
  
rates	
  and	
  does	
  not	
  speculate	
  on	
  
future	
  changes	
  in	
  interest	
  rates	
  or	
  
currencies.	
  

The	
  group’s	
  policy	
  is	
  to	
  regularly	
  
review	
  its	
  exposure	
  to	
  interest	
  rate	
  
risk,	
  and	
  in	
  particular	
  the	
  mix	
  
between	
  fixed	
  and	
  floating	
  rate	
  
facilities.	
  	
  	
  The	
  percentage	
  of	
  
borrowings	
  on	
  fixed	
  rate	
  terms	
  at	
  
31	
  December	
  2012	
  was	
  29%	
  (2011:	
  
1%).	
  Floating	
  rate	
  liabilities	
  are	
  
primarily	
  indexed	
  to	
  LIBOR.

The	
  group	
  did	
  not	
  enter	
  into	
  any	
  
interest	
  rate	
  swap	
  instruments	
  
during	
  2012.	
  	
  This	
  remains	
  under	
  
regular	
  review.

As	
  a	
  guide	
  to	
  the	
  sensitivity	
  of	
  the	
  
group’s	
  results	
  to	
  movements	
  in	
  
interest	
  rates,	
  a	
  100	
  basis	
  point	
  
(1%)	
  movement	
  in	
  interest	
  rates	
  
would	
  have	
  impacted	
  the	
  2012	
  
annual	
  interest	
  charge	
  by	
  
approximately	
  £100,000.

Credit	
  risk

The	
  majority	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
revenues	
  are	
  derived	
  from	
  large	
  
multinational	
  organisations.	
  
Therefore	
  the	
  credit	
  risk	
  is	
  
considered	
  to	
  be	
  small.	
  

Where	
  the	
  group	
  assesses	
  a	
  
potential	
  credit	
  risk,	
  this	
  is	
  dealt	
  
with	
  either	
  by	
  up-­‐front	
  payment	
  
prior	
  to	
  the	
  shipment	
  of	
  goods	
  or	
  
by	
  other	
  credit	
  risk	
  mitigation	
  
measures.	
  As	
  a	
  result	
  the	
  group	
  has	
  
historically	
  had	
  and	
  continues	
  to	
  
have	
  a	
  very	
  low	
  level	
  of	
  payment	
  
default.

Currency	
  risk

(a)	
  Cash	
  flow	
  risk

The	
  group’s	
  presentational	
  
currency	
  is	
  sterling.	
  However,	
  the	
  
majority	
  of	
  sales	
  are	
  denominated	
  
in	
  US	
  dollars.	
  	
  Therefore,	
  the	
  
group’s	
  cash	
  flows	
  are	
  affected	
  by	
  
fluctuations	
  in	
  the	
  rate	
  of	
  exchange	
  
between	
  Sterling	
  and	
  the	
  US	
  dollar.	
  

This	
  exposure	
  is	
  managed	
  by	
  a	
  
natural	
  currency	
  hedge	
  because	
  a	
  
significant	
  portion	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
cost	
  base	
  is	
  also	
  denominated	
  in	
  US	
  
dollars.	
  	
  In	
  particular,	
  the	
  majority	
  
of	
  the	
  group’s	
  raw	
  materials	
  are	
  
purchased	
  in	
  US	
  dollars,	
  and	
  a	
  
significant	
  portion	
  of	
  labour	
  and	
  
overheads	
  are	
  also	
  denominated	
  in	
  
US	
  dollars	
  as	
  three	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  
principal	
  subsidiaries	
  are	
  situated	
  in	
  
North	
  America.	
  	
  	
  

To	
  a	
  lesser	
  extent,	
  the	
  group	
  also	
  
generates	
  sales	
  in	
  other	
  currencies	
  
including	
  Yen	
  and	
  Euros	
  which	
  are	
  
also	
  partially	
  hedged	
  where	
  
possible	
  by	
  purchases	
  of	
  some	
  raw	
  
materials	
  in	
  these	
  currencies.

Taking	
  into	
  account	
  the	
  extent	
  of	
  
the	
  natural	
  hedge	
  within	
  the	
  
business	
  model,	
  management	
  
periodically	
  use	
  forward	
  exchange	
  

contracts	
  to	
  mitigate	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  
the	
  residual	
  foreign	
  currency	
  
exposure.	
  As	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  
there	
  were	
  no	
  contracts	
  in	
  place.

(b)	
  Fair	
  value	
  risk

The	
  group	
  has	
  operations	
  in	
  the	
  
UK,	
  North	
  America	
  and	
  Asia.	
  
Translation	
  exposures	
  that	
  arise	
  on	
  
converting	
  the	
  results	
  of	
  overseas	
  
subsidiaries	
  are	
  not	
  hedged.	
  	
  Net	
  
assets	
  held	
  in	
  foreign	
  currencies	
  are	
  
hedged	
  wherever	
  practical	
  by	
  
matching	
  borrowings	
  in	
  the	
  same	
  
currency.	
  	
  

As	
  a	
  guide	
  to	
  the	
  sensitivity	
  of	
  the	
  
group’s	
  results	
  to	
  movements	
  in	
  
foreign	
  currency	
  exchange	
  rates,	
  a	
  
one	
  cent	
  movement	
  in	
  the	
  US	
  
dollar	
  to	
  Sterling	
  rate	
  would	
  impact	
  
annual	
  earnings	
  by	
  approximately	
  
£100,000	
  (2011:	
  £100,000).

Liquidity	
  risk

Prudent	
  liquidity	
  risk	
  management	
  
requires	
  maintaining	
  sufficient	
  cash	
  
and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  and	
  the	
  
availability	
  of	
  funding	
  through	
  
committed	
  credit	
  facilities.

Management	
  utilises	
  detailed	
  
rolling	
  cash	
  flow	
  forecasts	
  as	
  part	
  of	
  
its	
  cash	
  management.	
  This	
  includes	
  
weekly	
  forecasts	
  for	
  the	
  next	
  
quarter	
  and	
  monthly	
  forecasts	
  for	
  
the	
  next	
  12	
  months.

40

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Capital	
  risk

The	
  group’s	
  main	
  objectives	
  when	
  
managing	
  capital	
  are	
  to	
  safeguard	
  
the	
  group’s	
  ability	
  to	
  continue	
  as	
  a	
  
going	
  concern	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  provide	
  
returns	
  for	
  shareholders	
  and	
  
benefits	
  for	
  other	
  stakeholders	
  and	
  
to	
  maintain	
  an	
  optimal	
  capital	
  
structure	
  to	
  reduce	
  the	
  cost	
  of	
  
capital.

The	
  group	
  defines	
  total	
  capital	
  as	
  
equity	
  in	
  the	
  consolidated	
  balance	
  
sheet	
  plus	
  net	
  debt	
  or	
  less	
  net	
  
funds	
  (note	
  23).	
  Total	
  capital	
  at	
  31	
  
December	
  2012	
  was	
  £106,079,000	
  
(2011:	
  £76,671,000).	
  

Consistent	
  with	
  others	
  in	
  the	
  
industry,	
  the	
  group	
  monitors	
  
capital	
  on	
  the	
  basis	
  of	
  the	
  gearing	
  
ratio.	
  This	
  ratio	
  is	
  calculated	
  as	
  net	
  
debt	
  divided	
  by	
  total	
  capital.	
  At	
  31	
  
December	
  2012	
  the	
  gearing	
  ratio	
  
was	
  15%	
  (2011:	
  5%).

All	
  covenants	
  in	
  relation	
  to	
  the	
  
group’s	
  borrowing	
  facilities	
  have	
  
been	
  complied	
  with	
  during	
  the	
  
year.

Statement	
  of	
  directors’	
  
responsibilities

The	
  directors	
  are	
  responsible	
  for	
  
preparing	
  the	
  Annual	
  Report	
  and	
  
the	
  financial	
  statements	
  in	
  
accordance	
  with	
  applicable	
  law	
  and	
  
regulations.

Company	
  law	
  requires	
  the	
  directors	
  
to	
  prepare	
  financial	
  statements	
  for	
  
each	
  financial	
  year.	
  Under	
  that	
  law	
  
the	
  directors	
  have	
  prepared	
  the	
  
group	
  and	
  parent	
  company	
  
financial	
  statements	
  in	
  accordance	
  
with	
  International	
  Financial	
  
Reporting	
  Standards	
  (IFRSs)	
  as	
  
adopted	
  by	
  the	
  European	
  Union.	
  

Under	
  company	
  law	
  the	
  directors	
  
must	
  not	
  approve	
  the	
  financial	
  
statements	
  unless	
  they	
  are	
  satisfied	
  
that	
  they	
  give	
  a	
  true	
  and	
  fair	
  view	
  
of	
  the	
  state	
  of	
  affairs	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  
and	
  the	
  company	
  and	
  of	
  the	
  profit	
  
or	
  loss	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  for	
  that	
  period.	
  	
  

In	
  preparing	
  these	
  financial	
  
statements,	
  the	
  directors	
  are	
  
required	
  to:

select	
  suitable	
  accounting	
  policies	
  
and	
  then	
  apply	
  them	
  consistently;

make	
  judgements	
  and	
  accounting	
  
estimates	
  that	
  are	
  reasonable	
  and	
  
prudent;

state	
  whether	
  applicable	
  IFRSs	
  as	
  
adopted	
  by	
  the	
  European	
  Union	
  
have	
  been	
  followed,	
  subject	
  to	
  any	
  
material	
  departures	
  disclosed	
  and	
  
explained	
  in	
  the	
  financial	
  
statements;

prepare	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  on	
  
the	
  going	
  concern	
  basis	
  unless	
  it	
  is	
  
inappropriate	
  to	
  presume	
  that	
  the	
  
company	
  will	
  continue	
  in	
  business.

The	
  directors	
  are	
  responsible	
  for	
  
keeping	
  adequate	
  accounting	
  
records	
  that	
  are	
  sufficient	
  to	
  show	
  
and	
  explain	
  the	
  company’s	
  
transactions	
  and	
  disclose	
  with	
  
reasonable	
  accuracy	
  at	
  any	
  time	
  
the	
  financial	
  position	
  of	
  the	
  
company	
  and	
  the	
  group	
  and	
  enable	
  
them	
  to	
  ensure	
  that	
  the	
  financial	
  
statements	
  and	
  the	
  Directors’	
  
Remuneration	
  Report	
  comply	
  with	
  
the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006.	
  They	
  are	
  
also	
  responsible	
  for	
  safeguarding	
  
the	
  assets	
  of	
  the	
  company	
  and	
  the	
  
group	
  and	
  hence	
  for	
  taking	
  
reasonable	
  steps	
  for	
  the	
  prevention	
  
and	
  detection	
  of	
  fraud	
  and	
  other	
  
irregularities.

The	
  directors	
  are	
  responsible	
  for	
  
the	
  maintenance	
  and	
  integrity	
  of	
  
the	
  group’s	
  website,	
  
www.iqep.com.	
  

Legislation	
  in	
  the	
  United	
  Kingdom	
  
governing	
  the	
  preparation	
  and	
  
dissemination	
  of	
  financial	
  
statements	
  may	
  differ	
  from	
  
legislation	
  in	
  other	
  jurisdictions.	
  	
  

Provision	
  of	
  information	
  
to	
  auditors	
  

So	
  far	
  as	
  the	
  directors	
  are	
  aware,	
  
there	
  is	
  no	
  relevant	
  audit	
  
information	
  of	
  which	
  the	
  
company’s	
  auditors	
  are	
  unaware.	
  	
  
The	
  directors	
  have	
  taken	
  all	
  the	
  
steps	
  that	
  ought	
  to	
  have	
  been	
  
taken	
  as	
  directors	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  make	
  
themselves	
  aware	
  of	
  any	
  relevant	
  
audit	
  information	
  and	
  to	
  establish	
  
that	
  the	
  company’s	
  auditors	
  are	
  
aware	
  of	
  that	
  information.	
  	
  

Independent	
  Auditors

A	
  resolution	
  to	
  reappoint	
  
PricewaterhouseCoopers	
  LLP	
  will	
  
be	
  proposed	
  at	
  the	
  forthcoming	
  
Annual	
  General	
  Meeting.

Approved	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors	
  
and	
  signed	
  on	
  behalf	
  of	
  the	
  Board.

Phillip	
  Rasmussen

Finance	
  Director	
  &	
  Company	
  
Secretary

20	
  March	
  2013

41

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Remuneration	
  report

Introduction

This	
  report	
  has	
  been	
  prepared	
  in	
  
accordance	
  with	
  the	
  Directors’	
  
Remuneration	
  Report	
  Regulations	
  
2007	
  which	
  introduced	
  new	
  
statutory	
  requirements	
  for	
  the	
  
disclosure	
  of	
  directors’	
  
remuneration.	
  	
  Although	
  not	
  
required	
  to,	
  the	
  directors	
  have	
  
decided	
  to	
  provide	
  directors’	
  
remuneration	
  disclosures	
  similar	
  to	
  
those	
  that	
  would	
  be	
  required	
  of	
  a	
  
fully	
  listed	
  company.	
  	
  	
  In	
  particular,	
  
the	
  Remuneration	
  Report	
  describes	
  
how	
  the	
  Board	
  has	
  applied	
  the	
  
principles	
  of	
  good	
  governance	
  
relating	
  to	
  directors’	
  remuneration	
  
set	
  out	
  in	
  the	
  UK	
  Corporate	
  
Governance	
  Code.	
  	
  A	
  resolution	
  to	
  
approve	
  the	
  report	
  will	
  be	
  proposed	
  
at	
  the	
  forthcoming	
  Annual	
  General	
  
Meeting	
  of	
  the	
  company.

The	
  report	
  has	
  been	
  divided	
  into	
  
separate	
  sections	
  for	
  unaudited	
  
and	
  audited	
  information.

Unaudited	
  information

(a)	
  Remuneration	
  Committee

The	
  Board	
  considers	
  itself	
  
ultimately	
  responsible	
  for	
  the	
  
framework	
  and	
  cost	
  of	
  executive	
  
remuneration,	
  but	
  has	
  delegated	
  
responsibility	
  for	
  determining	
  the	
  
remuneration	
  levels	
  and	
  conditions	
  
of	
  service	
  for	
  executive	
  directors	
  
and	
  senior	
  executives	
  to	
  the	
  
remuneration	
  committee.	
  	
  The	
  
committee’s	
  approach	
  is	
  fully	
  
consistent	
  with	
  the	
  company’s	
  
overall	
  philosophy	
  that	
  all	
  
employees	
  should	
  be	
  competitively	
  
rewarded	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  attract	
  and	
  
retain	
  their	
  valued	
  skills	
  in	
  the	
  

business,	
  as	
  well	
  as	
  supporting	
  
corporate	
  strategy	
  by	
  directly	
  
aligning	
  executive	
  management	
  
with	
  the	
  company’s	
  strategic	
  
business	
  goals.	
  

The	
  remuneration	
  committee	
  is	
  
comprised	
  exclusively	
  of	
  
independent	
  non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  of	
  the	
  company	
  who	
  have	
  
no	
  personal	
  financial	
  interest,	
  other	
  
than	
  as	
  shareholders,	
  in	
  the	
  
matters	
  to	
  be	
  decided.	
  	
  The	
  
members	
  of	
  the	
  committee	
  
throughout	
  the	
  year	
  were	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  
Ainsworth	
  and	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson.	
  	
  	
  The	
  
Chairman	
  of	
  the	
  committee	
  is	
  S	
  J	
  
Gibson.	
  	
  

The	
  committee	
  follows	
  the	
  
provisions	
  of	
  Schedule	
  A	
  to	
  the	
  UK	
  
Corporate	
  Governance	
  Code,	
  and	
  is	
  
responsible	
  for	
  determining	
  the	
  
company’s	
  policy	
  on	
  compensation	
  
of	
  executive	
  directors	
  and	
  the	
  basis	
  
of	
  their	
  service	
  agreements	
  with	
  
due	
  regard	
  to	
  the	
  interests	
  of	
  
shareholders.	
  	
  	
  It	
  also	
  approves	
  the	
  
allocation	
  of	
  share	
  options	
  to	
  
employees.	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  

The	
  committee	
  operates	
  under	
  
clear	
  written	
  terms	
  of	
  reference	
  
and	
  has	
  access	
  to	
  and	
  takes	
  
independent	
  professional	
  advice	
  as	
  
appropriate.	
  	
  The	
  committee	
  met	
  
four	
  times	
  during	
  2012	
  to	
  review	
  
the	
  performance	
  of	
  the	
  executive	
  
directors	
  and	
  other	
  senior	
  
executives,	
  and	
  set	
  the	
  scale	
  and	
  
structure	
  of	
  their	
  remuneration.	
  

(b)	
  Remuneration	
  policy

In	
  establishing	
  its	
  remuneration	
  
policy,	
  the	
  committee	
  has	
  given	
  full	
  
consideration	
  to	
  Schedule	
  B	
  of	
  the	
  
Best	
  Practices	
  Provisions	
  annexed	
  

to	
  the	
  Listing	
  Rules	
  of	
  the	
  Financial	
  
Services	
  Authority.	
  The	
  
remuneration	
  packages	
  for	
  
executive	
  directors	
  and	
  senior	
  
executives,	
  as	
  determined	
  by	
  the	
  
committee,	
  are	
  intended	
  to	
  attract	
  
and	
  retain	
  high	
  quality	
  executives,	
  
induce	
  loyalty	
  and	
  motivate	
  them	
  
to	
  achieve	
  a	
  high	
  level	
  of	
  corporate	
  
performance	
  in	
  line	
  with	
  the	
  best	
  
interests	
  of	
  shareholders,	
  while	
  not	
  
being	
  excessive.	
  The	
  remuneration	
  
of	
  the	
  executive	
  directors	
  consists	
  
of	
  annual	
  salary,	
  performance	
  
bonus,	
  share	
  options,	
  taxable	
  
benefits	
  in	
  kind	
  and	
  pension	
  
contributions.

There	
  is	
  an	
  annual	
  review	
  at	
  which	
  
the	
  committee	
  approves	
  the	
  basic	
  
salary	
  and	
  profit	
  sharing	
  bonus	
  
scheme	
  for	
  each	
  executive	
  director.	
  
The	
  committee	
  receives	
  input	
  from	
  
the	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  regarding	
  
recommended	
  packages	
  for	
  
executive	
  directors	
  and	
  senior	
  
executives.

(c)	
  Basic	
  salary

Basic	
  salary	
  is	
  determined	
  by	
  
reference	
  to	
  individual	
  
responsibilities,	
  performance	
  and	
  
external	
  market	
  data.

(d)	
  Performance	
  bonus

Bonus	
  payments	
  are	
  linked	
  to	
  the	
  
executive	
  directors	
  achieving	
  
internal	
  annual	
  plan	
  targets	
  in	
  
respect	
  of	
  profitability	
  and	
  other	
  
non-­‐financial	
  performance	
  criteria.	
  	
  
Bonuses	
  were	
  awarded	
  to	
  certain	
  
directors	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  2012	
  in	
  
accordance	
  with	
  this	
  scheme.

42

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

(e)	
  Taxable	
  benefits	
  in	
  kind

The	
  company	
  reimbursed	
  all	
  fuel	
  
and	
  maintenance	
  costs	
  in	
  respect	
  
of	
  the	
  executive	
  directors’	
  private	
  
cars,	
  and	
  these	
  costs	
  are	
  treated	
  as	
  
taxable	
  benefits	
  in	
  kind.	
  	
  Other	
  
taxable	
  benefits	
  comprise	
  medical	
  
health	
  and	
  life	
  insurance.

(f)	
  Share	
  incentive	
  schemes

The	
  company	
  operates	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  
share	
  incentive	
  schemes.	
  The	
  IQE	
  
Plc	
  Share	
  Option	
  Scheme,	
  as	
  
adopted	
  on	
  26	
  May	
  2000	
  and	
  
amended	
  by	
  shareholders	
  at	
  the	
  

company’s	
  Annual	
  General	
  Meeting	
  
on	
  17	
  May	
  2002,	
  allows	
  the	
  
company	
  to	
  grant	
  options	
  over	
  up	
  
to	
  15%	
  of	
  the	
  issued	
  share	
  capital	
  
and	
  those	
  options	
  are	
  subject	
  to	
  
performance	
  conditions.	
  	
  	
  

During	
  the	
  year,	
  the	
  committee	
  
approved	
  the	
  grant	
  of	
  2,761,361	
  
share	
  options	
  to	
  staff	
  (2011:	
  
5,889,277	
  share	
  options).	
  During	
  
2012,	
  Directors	
  were	
  awarded	
  nil	
  
cost	
  options	
  over	
  6,710,583	
  
ordinary	
  shares	
  in	
  the	
  company	
  
(2011:	
  nil).	
  	
  

Option	
  price

Share	
  options	
  of	
  nil	
  cost	
  to	
  10p/option
Share	
  options	
  in	
  excess	
  of	
  10p/option	
  to	
  20p/option
Share	
  options	
  in	
  excess	
  of	
  20p/option	
  to	
  30p/option
Share	
  options	
  in	
  excess	
  of	
  30p/option
Total

As	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012,	
  
38,693,514	
  share	
  options	
  (2011:	
  
51,043,125	
  share	
  options)	
  granted	
  
under	
  the	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  Share	
  Option	
  
Scheme	
  remain	
  outstanding	
  with	
  
exercise	
  prices	
  ranging	
  from	
  nil	
  cost	
  
to	
  86p/option	
  (2011:	
  nil	
  cost	
  to	
  86p/
option).	
  	
  14,935,129	
  share	
  options	
  
were	
  exercised	
  by	
  directors	
  during	
  
the	
  year	
  (2011:	
  6,241,500).	
  
2,251,349	
  of	
  directors	
  share	
  options	
  
lapsed	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  (2011:	
  nil)	
  	
  
The	
  numbers	
  and	
  prices	
  of	
  share	
  
options	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  and	
  
31	
  December	
  2011	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

2012
No.	
  of	
  options

2011
No.	
  of	
  options

21,133,728
14,234,831
1,970,000
1,354,956
38,693,514

23,446,947
25,377,375
754,000
1,464,803
51,043,125

(g)	
  Directors’	
  interests	
  in	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc

The	
  interests	
  in	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  of	
  those	
  directors	
  holding	
  office	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

Name	
  of	
  director

Executive:
Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson
Dr	
  H	
  R	
  Williams
P	
  J	
  Rasmussen

Non-­‐Executive:
Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth
S	
  J	
  Gibson
Dr	
  D	
  Grant
Total

As	
  at	
  
1	
  January	
  2012

As	
  at	
  
31	
  December	
  2012

27,482,913
678,342
495,000

3,121,999
301,855
-­‐
32,080,109

29,830,132
1,672,430
852,822

3,121,999
301,855
-­‐
35,779,238

43

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The	
  interests	
  in	
  share	
  options	
  in	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  of	
  those	
  directors	
  who	
  held	
  office	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

Name	
  of	
  director

Executive:
Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson
Dr	
  H	
  R	
  Williams
P	
  J	
  Rasmussen

Non-­‐Executive:
Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth
S	
  J	
  Gibson
Dr	
  D	
  Grant
Total

As	
  at	
  
1	
  January	
  2012

Options	
  
granted

Options	
  
exercised

As	
  at	
  
31	
  December	
  2012

Date(s)	
  from	
  
which	
  exercisable

12,845,124
5,386,433
2,586,393

2,370,669
1,499,656
1,499,656

(10,283,219)
(3,494,088)
(1,157,822)

4,932,574
3,392,001
2,928,227

1	
  Jan	
  2012	
  to	
  1	
  Jan	
  2015
1	
  Jan	
  2012	
  to	
  1	
  Jan	
  2015
1	
  Jan	
  2012	
  to	
  1	
  Jan	
  2015

-­‐
-­‐
-­‐

20,817,950

-­‐
-­‐
-­‐

11,252,802

The	
  highest	
  and	
  lowest	
  mid-­‐market	
  share	
  prices	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  the	
  shares	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  during	
  2012	
  were	
  33.25p/share	
  
and	
  18.72p/share	
  respectively	
  (2011:	
  59.00p/share	
  and	
  17.75p/share	
  respectively).	
  	
  The	
  mid-­‐market	
  price	
  of	
  IQE	
  plc	
  
shares	
  closed	
  at	
  30.75p/share	
  as	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  (2011:	
  18.72p/share).

(h)	
  Pension	
  arrangements

The	
  executive	
  directors	
  are	
  
members	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  defined	
  
contribution	
  pension	
  schemes	
  and	
  
their	
  pension	
  contributions	
  are	
  
based	
  on	
  a	
  percentage	
  of	
  basic	
  
annual	
  salary.	
  	
  Their	
  dependants	
  
are	
  eligible	
  for	
  the	
  payment	
  of	
  a	
  
lump	
  sum	
  in	
  the	
  event	
  of	
  death	
  in	
  
service.	
  	
  There	
  have	
  been	
  no	
  
changes	
  in	
  the	
  terms	
  of	
  directors’	
  
pension	
  entitlements	
  during	
  2012,	
  
and	
  there	
  were	
  no	
  unfunded	
  
pension	
  promises	
  or	
  similar	
  
arrangements	
  for	
  directors	
  at	
  31	
  
December	
  2012.	
  

(i)	
  Executive	
  Directors’	
  service	
  
contracts

It	
  is	
  the	
  company’s	
  policy	
  to	
  
appoint	
  executive	
  directors	
  under	
  
service	
  agreements	
  which	
  are	
  
terminable	
  by	
  either	
  party	
  giving	
  
between	
  six	
  and	
  twelve	
  months’	
  
notice.	
  	
  	
  Each	
  of	
  the	
  agreements	
  
contain	
  post-­‐termination	
  restrictive	
  
covenants,	
  which	
  place	
  limitations	
  
on	
  solicitation	
  of	
  customers	
  and	
  
employees	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  and	
  on	
  
acting	
  in	
  competition	
  with	
  the	
  
business	
  of	
  the	
  group.	
  	
  There	
  are	
  no	
  
predetermined	
  provisions	
  for	
  
compensation	
  on	
  termination	
  
within	
  executive	
  directors’	
  service	
  

agreements.	
  	
  However,	
  the	
  
company	
  is	
  against	
  rewards	
  for	
  
failure	
  and	
  believes	
  that	
  severance	
  
arrangements	
  should	
  be	
  restricted	
  
to	
  basic	
  pay	
  and	
  consequential	
  
payments	
  such	
  as	
  earned	
  bonus.	
  In	
  
circumstances	
  where	
  there	
  is	
  no	
  
conflict	
  of	
  interest,	
  the	
  company	
  
allows	
  executive	
  directors	
  to	
  serve	
  
as	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors	
  
elsewhere.	
  In	
  such	
  circumstances	
  
the	
  remuneration	
  received	
  is	
  
retained	
  by	
  the	
  director.

44

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

(j)	
  Non-­‐Executive	
  Directors’	
  
contracts

The	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors	
  have	
  
entered	
  into	
  service	
  agreements	
  
with	
  the	
  company,	
  and	
  these	
  are	
  
terminable	
  by	
  either	
  party	
  on	
  three	
  
months’	
  notice.	
  	
  Non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  have	
  specific	
  terms	
  of	
  
engagement,	
  and	
  their	
  fees	
  are	
  
determined	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  within	
  the	
  
limits	
  set	
  by	
  the	
  company’s	
  Articles	
  
of	
  Association.	
  	
  	
  Non-­‐executive	
  
directors	
  do	
  not	
  take	
  part	
  in	
  
discussions	
  on	
  their	
  own	
  
remuneration.	
  	
  	
  There	
  were	
  no	
  
changes	
  to	
  non-­‐executive	
  
remuneration	
  during	
  2012.

The	
  services	
  of	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth	
  
were	
  paid	
  in	
  cash.	
  	
  £70,000	
  (2011:	
  
£70,000),	
  was	
  paid	
  to	
  Horton	
  
Corporate	
  Finance	
  for	
  his	
  fees	
  and	
  

expenses	
  for	
  2012.	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  
Ainsworth	
  is	
  a	
  director	
  of	
  Horton	
  
Corporate	
  Finance.	
  VAT	
  was	
  
charged	
  on	
  the	
  invoices	
  from	
  
Horton	
  Corporate	
  Finance	
  and	
  this	
  
was	
  recovered	
  by	
  the	
  company.	
  

The	
  services	
  of	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson	
  were	
  paid	
  
in	
  cash.	
  	
  £35,000	
  (2011:	
  £35,000),	
  
was	
  paid	
  to	
  Fishstone	
  Limited	
  for	
  
his	
  fees	
  and	
  expenses	
  for	
  2012.	
  S	
  J	
  
Gibson	
  is	
  a	
  shareholder	
  in	
  Fishstone	
  
Limited.	
  VAT	
  was	
  charged	
  on	
  the	
  
invoices	
  from	
  Fishstone	
  Limited	
  
and	
  this	
  was	
  recovered	
  by	
  the	
  
company.	
  

The	
  services	
  of	
  Dr	
  D	
  Grant	
  were	
  
payable	
  in	
  cash.	
  	
  £12,000	
  (2011:	
  
£nil).

The	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors	
  receive	
  
no	
  other	
  pay	
  or	
  benefits,	
  do	
  not	
  
participate	
  in	
  the	
  company’s	
  share	
  
schemes,	
  and	
  are	
  not	
  eligible	
  for	
  
pension	
  scheme	
  membership.	
  	
  
Neither	
  had	
  any	
  share	
  options	
  in	
  
the	
  company	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  
and	
  it	
  is	
  not	
  intended	
  that	
  share	
  
options	
  will	
  be	
  issued	
  to	
  them	
  in	
  
the	
  future	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  Best	
  
Practice	
  Guidelines	
  issued	
  by	
  the	
  
Association	
  of	
  British	
  Insurers.

(k)	
  Share	
  price	
  performance

The	
  IQE	
  plc	
  share	
  price	
  has	
  been	
  
compared	
  with	
  the	
  AIM	
  market	
  all-­‐
share	
  index	
  for	
  the	
  five	
  year	
  period	
  
2007	
  to	
  2012	
  as	
  this	
  was	
  considered	
  
to	
  be	
  the	
  most	
  representative	
  
market	
  group.	
  	
  	
  	
  

Five	
  year	
  share	
  price	
  performance:	
  IQE	
  plc	
  share	
  price	
  compared	
  with	
  AiM	
  all	
  share	
  index,	
  2008	
  to	
  2012.

45

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Audited	
  information

(a)	
  Aggregate	
  directors’	
  remuneration

The	
  total	
  amounts	
  paid	
  for	
  directors’	
  remuneration	
  during	
  2012	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

Basic	
  salaries
Bonuses
Non-­‐executive	
  fees
Subtotal	
  salaries	
  and	
  fees
Car	
  allowance
Benefits	
  in	
  kind
Money	
  purchase	
  pension	
  contributions
Total

(b)	
  Directors	
  emoluments

2012
£’000

718
51
117
835
115
20
49
1,070

2011
£’000

752
134
105
991
116
28
45
1,180

The	
  aggregate	
  emoluments	
  paid	
  to	
  each	
  director	
  during	
  2012	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

Name	
  of	
  director

Salary	
  
fees	
  and	
  bonuses
£’000

Car
allowance
£’000

Benefits	
  in	
  
kind
£’000

Pensions

£’000

2012	
  
Total
£’000

2011	
  
Total
£’000

Executive:
Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson
Dr	
  H	
  R	
  Williams
P	
  J	
  Rasmussen	
  
A	
  G	
  Meldrum	
  
(Resigned	
  21	
  September	
  2012)

Non-­‐Executive:
Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth
S	
  J	
  Gibson
Dr	
  D	
  Grant	
  
Dr	
  D	
  Grant	
  
(Appointed	
  18	
  September	
  2012)
(Appointed	
  18	
  September	
  2012)
Total

Notes:

271
171
167

160

42
27
27
19

9
2
8

1

-­‐
20
24

6

322
220
226

186

70
35

12

367
243
249

216

70
35

-­‐

1,070

1,180

In	
  aggregate,	
  the	
  executive	
  directors	
  made	
  a	
  gain	
  of	
  £3,493,661	
  (2011:	
  £2,465,000)	
  on	
  the	
  exercise	
  of	
  share	
  options	
  
during	
  the	
  year.	
  The	
  majority	
  of	
  the	
  shares	
  obtained	
  on	
  the	
  exercise	
  of	
  these	
  options	
  were	
  sold	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  satisfy	
  the	
  
option	
  price	
  and	
  tax	
  arising	
  on	
  the	
  exercise.	
  The	
  shares	
  retained	
  are	
  included	
  in	
  the	
  closing	
  totals	
  shown	
  on	
  the	
  next	
  
page.	
  Dr	
  Nelson	
  made	
  a	
  gain	
  of	
  £1,570,762	
  as	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  exercises.

Approval	
  

This	
  report	
  was	
  approved	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors	
  on	
  20	
  March	
  2013	
  and	
  signed	
  on	
  its	
  behalf	
  by:

S	
  J	
  Gibson,	
  OBE

46

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Independent	
  auditors’	
  report	
  to	
  the	
  members	
  of	
  
IQE	
  plc

We	
  have	
  audited	
  the	
  group	
  and	
  parent	
  company	
  financial	
  statements	
  (the	
  ‘‘financial	
  statements’’)	
  of	
  IQE	
  plc	
  for	
  the	
  
year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  which	
  comprise	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement,	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Statement	
  of	
  
Comprehensive	
  Income,	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  and	
  Parent	
  Company	
  Balance	
  Sheets,	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  and	
  Parent	
  Company	
  
Cash	
  Flow	
  Statements,	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  and	
  Parent	
  Company	
  Statements	
  of	
  Changes	
  in	
  Equity	
  and	
  the	
  related	
  notes.	
  
The	
  financial	
  reporting	
  framework	
  that	
  has	
  been	
  applied	
  in	
  their	
  preparation	
  is	
  applicable	
  law	
  and	
  International	
  
Financial	
  Reporting	
  Standards	
  (IFRSs)	
  as	
  adopted	
  by	
  the	
  European	
  Union	
  and,	
  as	
  regards	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  financial	
  
statements,	
  as	
  applied	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  provisions	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006.

Respective	
  responsibilities	
  of	
  directors	
  and	
  auditors

As	
  explained	
  more	
  fully	
  in	
  the	
  Directors’	
  Responsibilities	
  Statement	
  set	
  out	
  on	
  page	
  41,	
  the	
  directors	
  are	
  responsible	
  for	
  
the	
  preparation	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  and	
  for	
  being	
  satisfied	
  that	
  they	
  give	
  a	
  true	
  and	
  fair	
  view.	
  Our	
  responsibility	
  
is	
  to	
  audit	
  and	
  express	
  an	
  opinion	
  on	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  applicable	
  law	
  and	
  International	
  
Standards	
  on	
  Auditing	
  (UK	
  and	
  Ireland).	
  Those	
  standards	
  require	
  us	
  to	
  comply	
  with	
  the	
  Auditing	
  Practices	
  Board’s	
  
Ethical	
  Standards	
  for	
  Auditors.

This	
  report,	
  including	
  the	
  opinions,	
  has	
  been	
  prepared	
  for	
  and	
  only	
  for	
  the	
  company’s	
  members	
  as	
  a	
  body	
  in	
  accordance	
  
with	
  Chapter	
  3	
  of	
  Part	
  16	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006	
  and	
  for	
  no	
  other	
  purpose.	
  	
  We	
  do	
  not,	
  in	
  giving	
  these	
  opinions,	
  
accept	
  or	
  assume	
  responsibility	
  for	
  any	
  other	
  purpose	
  or	
  to	
  any	
  other	
  person	
  to	
  whom	
  this	
  report	
  is	
  shown	
  or	
  into	
  
whose	
  hands	
  it	
  may	
  come	
  save	
  where	
  expressly	
  agreed	
  by	
  our	
  prior	
  consent	
  in	
  writing.

Scope	
  of	
  the	
  audit	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  statements

An	
  audit	
  involves	
  obtaining	
  evidence	
  about	
  the	
  amounts	
  and	
  disclosures	
  in	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  sufficient	
  to	
  give	
  
reasonable	
  assurance	
  that	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  are	
  free	
  from	
  material	
  misstatement,	
  whether	
  caused	
  by	
  fraud	
  or	
  
error.	
  This	
  includes	
  an	
  assessment	
  of:	
  whether	
  the	
  accounting	
  policies	
  are	
  appropriate	
  to	
  the	
  company’s	
  circumstances	
  
and	
  have	
  been	
  consistently	
  applied	
  and	
  adequately	
  disclosed;	
  the	
  reasonableness	
  of	
  significant	
  accounting	
  estimates	
  
made	
  by	
  the	
  directors;	
  and	
  the	
  overall	
  presentation	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  statements.	
  In	
  addition,	
  we	
  read	
  all	
  the	
  financial	
  
and	
  non-­‐financial	
  information	
  in	
  the	
  Annual	
  Report	
  to	
  identify	
  material	
  inconsistencies	
  with	
  the	
  audited	
  financial	
  
statements.	
  If	
  we	
  become	
  aware	
  of	
  any	
  apparent	
  material	
  misstatements	
  or	
  inconsistencies	
  we	
  consider	
  the	
  
implications	
  for	
  our	
  report.

Opinion	
  on	
  financial	
  statements	
  

In	
  our	
  opinion:	
  

• the	
  financial	
  statements	
  give	
  a	
  true	
  and	
  fair	
  view	
  of	
  the	
  state	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  and	
  of	
  the	
  parent	
  company’s	
  affairs	
  as	
  
at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  and	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  profit	
  and	
  group’s	
  and	
  parent	
  company’s	
  cash	
  flows	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  then	
  
ended;

• the	
  group	
  financial	
  statements	
  have	
  been	
  properly	
  prepared	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  IFRSs	
  as	
  adopted	
  by	
  the	
  European	
  

Union;	
  

• the	
  parent	
  company	
  financial	
  statements	
  have	
  been	
  properly	
  prepared	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  IFRSs	
  as	
  adopted	
  by	
  the	
  

European	
  Union	
  and	
  as	
  applied	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  provisions	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006;	
  and

• the	
  financial	
  statements	
  have	
  been	
  prepared	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  requirements	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006.

47

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Opinion	
  on	
  other	
  matter	
  prescribed	
  by	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006

In	
  our	
  opinion,	
  the	
  information	
  given	
  in	
  the	
  Directors’	
  Report	
  for	
  the	
  financial	
  year	
  for	
  which	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  
are	
  prepared	
  is	
  consistent	
  with	
  the	
  financial	
  statements.

Matters	
  on	
  which	
  we	
  are	
  required	
  to	
  report	
  by	
  exception

We	
  have	
  nothing	
  to	
  report	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  the	
  following	
  matters	
  where	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006	
  requires	
  us	
  to	
  report	
  to	
  
you	
  if,	
  in	
  our	
  opinion:

• adequate	
  accounting	
  records	
  have	
  not	
  been	
  kept	
  by	
  the	
  parent	
  company,	
  or	
  returns	
  adequate	
  for	
  our	
  audit	
  have	
  not	
  

been	
  received	
  from	
  branches	
  not	
  visited	
  by	
  us;	
  or

• the	
  parent	
  company	
  financial	
  statements	
  are	
  not	
  in	
  agreement	
  with	
  the	
  accounting	
  records	
  and	
  returns;	
  or

• certain	
  disclosures	
  of	
  directors’	
  remuneration	
  specified	
  by	
  law	
  are	
  not	
  made;	
  or

• we	
  have	
  not	
  received	
  all	
  the	
  information	
  and	
  explanations	
  we	
  require	
  for	
  our	
  audit.

The	
  directors	
  have	
  requested,	
  (because	
  the	
  company	
  applies	
  Listing	
  Rules	
  9.8.6R	
  5	
  and	
  6	
  of	
  the	
  Financial	
  Services	
  
Authority	
  as	
  if	
  it	
  were	
  a	
  listed	
  company),	
  that	
  we	
  review	
  the	
  parts	
  of	
  the	
  Corporate	
  Governance	
  Report	
  relating	
  to	
  the	
  
company’s	
  compliance	
  with	
  the	
  nine	
  provisions	
  of	
  the	
  UK	
  Corporate	
  Governance	
  Code	
  specified	
  for	
  our	
  review	
  by	
  the	
  
Listing	
  Rules	
  of	
  the	
  Financial	
  Services	
  Authority.	
  We	
  have	
  nothing	
  to	
  report	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  this	
  review.

At	
  the	
  request	
  of	
  the	
  directors,	
  we	
  have	
  also	
  audited	
  the	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  Directors’	
  Remuneration	
  Report	
  that	
  is	
  described	
  
as	
  having	
  been	
  audited.	
  In	
  our	
  opinion,	
  the	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  Directors’	
  Remuneration	
  Report	
  to	
  be	
  audited	
  has	
  been	
  properly	
  
prepared	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006.

Mark	
  Ellis	
  (Senior	
  Statutory	
  Auditor)

for	
  and	
  on	
  behalf	
  of	
  PricewaterhouseCoopers	
  LLP

Chartered	
  Accountants	
  and	
  Statutory	
  Auditors

Cardiff

20	
  March	
  2013

48

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Financial	
  statements

Consolidated	
  income	
  statement	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Revenue
Cost	
  of	
  sales

Gross	
  profit

Selling,	
  general	
  and	
  administrative	
  expenses

Operating	
  profit	
  before	
  exceptional	
  items

Exceptional	
  items

Operating	
  profit

Finance	
  costs

Profit	
  before	
  tax

Income	
  tax	
  credit

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  attributable	
  to	
  equity	
  shareholders
Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  attributable	
  to	
  equity	
  shareholders

Adjusted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

Basic	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

Adjusted	
  diluted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

Diluted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

Consolidated	
  statement	
  of	
  comprehensive	
  income

for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year

Currency	
  translation	
  differences	
  on	
  foreign	
  currency	
  net	
  investments

Foreign	
  exchange	
  hedges

Total	
  comprehensive	
  income	
  for	
  the	
  year

Note

3

4

4

6

7

9

9

9

9

2012
£’000

87,961
(69,491)

18,470

(11,456)

7,584

(570)

7,014

(886)

6,128

503

6,631

1.59p

1.16p

1.51p

1.10p

2011
£’000

75,318
(57,142)

18,176

(10,803)

7,373

-­‐

7,373

(481)

6,892

1,551

8,443

1.86p

1.62p

1.74p

1.51p

2012
£’000

6,631

(2,497)

-­‐

4,134

2011
£’000

8,443

432

(598)

8,277

49

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Consolidated	
  balance	
  sheet	
  as	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Non-­‐current	
  assets:

Intangible	
  assets

Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Investments

Deferred	
  tax	
  asset

Total	
  non-­‐current	
  assets

Current	
  assets:

Inventories

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Total	
  current	
  assets

Total	
  assets

Current	
  liabilities:

Borrowings

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

Total	
  current	
  liabilities

Non-­‐current	
  liabilities:

Borrowings

Other	
  payables

Total	
  non-­‐current	
  liabilities

Total	
  liabilities

Net	
  assets

Shareholders’	
  equity:

Share	
  capital

Share	
  premium

Retained	
  earnings

Other	
  reserves

Total	
  equity

Note

10

11

12

7

13

14

16

15

16

15

18

2012
£’000

54,165

62,320

3,205

14,549

134,239

18,351

19,186

2,773

40,310

174,549

(2,428)

(31,709)

(34,137)

(15,828)

(34,386)

(50,214)

(84,351)

90,198

5,882

33,445

42,749

8,122

90,198

2011
£’000

32,706

37,348

-­‐

1,876

71,930

15,122

14,338

3,233

32,693

104,623

(49)

(23,157)

(23,206)

(7,105)

(1,562)

(8,667)

(31,873)

72,750

5,251

22,122

36,118

9,259

72,750

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

These	
  financial	
  statements	
  were	
  approved	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors	
  on	
  20	
  March	
  2013

Signed	
  on	
  behalf	
  of	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors

P	
  J	
  Rasmussen

Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson

50

	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Consolidated	
  statement	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  equity	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  

2012

Share	
  
capital
£’000

Share	
  
premium
£’000

Retained	
  
earnings
£’000

Exchange	
  rate	
  
reserve
£’000

Other	
  
reserves
£’000

Total	
  
equity
£’000

Balance	
  at	
  1	
  January	
  2012

5,251

22,122

36,118

5,272

3,987

72,750

Comprehensive	
  income

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange	
  translation	
  differences

Total	
  comprehensive	
  income

Transactions	
  with	
  owners

Employee	
  share	
  option	
  scheme

Issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

Total	
  transactions	
  with	
  owners

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

631

631

11,323

11,323

6,631

-­‐

6,631

-­‐

(2,497)

(2,497)

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

6,631

(2,497)

4,134

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

1,360

1,360

1,360

11,954

13,314

Balance	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012

5,882

33,445

42,749

2,775

5,347

90,198

Balance	
  at	
  1	
  January	
  2011

5,153

21,237

28,019

4,840

3,025

62,274

Comprehensive	
  income

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange	
  translation	
  differences

Foreign	
  exchange	
  hedges

Total	
  comprehensive	
  income

Transactions	
  with	
  owners

Employee	
  share	
  option	
  scheme

Other	
  issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

Total	
  transactions	
  with	
  owners

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

98

98

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

885

885

8,443

-­‐

-­‐

8,443

(344)

-­‐

(344)

-­‐

432

-­‐

432

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

(598)

(598)

1,284

276

1,560

8,443

432

(598)

8,277

940

1,259

2,199

Balance	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2011

5,251

22,122

36,118

5,272

3,987

72,750

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

51

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Consolidated	
  cash	
  flow	
  statement	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  operating	
  activities:

Cash	
  inflow	
  from	
  operations

Net	
  interest	
  paid

Income	
  tax	
  received

Net	
  cash	
  generated	
  from	
  operating	
  activities

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  investing	
  activities:

Acquisition	
  deferred	
  consideration

Investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  Corporation

Development	
  expenditure

Investment	
  in	
  other	
  intangible	
  fixed	
  assets

Purchase	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Proceeds	
  from	
  sale	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Net	
  cash	
  used	
  in	
  investing	
  activities

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  financing	
  activities:

Issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  share	
  capital

Loans	
  and	
  leases	
  repaid

Loans	
  and	
  leases	
  received

Net	
  cash	
  generated	
  from	
  financing	
  activities

Net	
  decrease	
  in	
  cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  at	
  1	
  January

Exchange	
  gains	
  on	
  cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  at	
  31	
  December

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

Note

21

12

22

22

23

23

2012
£’000

4,109

(616)

1,284

4,777

(7,043)

(3,205)

(4,042)

(307)

(11,562)

-­‐

(26,159)

11,445

(1,383)

10,877

20,939

(443)

3,233

(17)

2,773

2011
£’000

10,823

(515)

13

10,321

(1,134)

-­‐

(3,666)

(328)

(15,517)

90

(20,555)

616

(6,933)

7,267

950

(9,284)

12,507

10

3,233

52

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Parent	
  company	
  balance	
  sheet	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Non-­‐current	
  assets:

Investments	
  

Total	
  non-­‐current	
  assets

Current	
  assets:

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Total	
  current	
  assets

Total	
  assets

Current	
  liabilities:

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

Total	
  current	
  liabilities

Non-­‐current	
  liabilities:

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

Borrowings

Total	
  non-­‐current	
  liabilities

Total	
  liabilities

Net	
  assets

Shareholders’	
  equity:

Share	
  capital

Share	
  premium

Retained	
  earnings

Other	
  reserves

Total	
  equity

Note

12

14

15

15

16

18

2012
£’000

16,143

16,143

56,392

3,161

59,553

75,696

(684)

(684)

(484)

(9,565)

(10,049)

(10,733)

64,963

5,882

33,445

20,103

5,533

64,963

2011
£’000

13,687

13,687

46,134

240

46,374

60,061

(1,737)

(1,737)

(1,562)

(7,087)

(8,649)

(10,386)

49,675

5,251

22,122

18,129

4,173

49,675

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

These	
  financial	
  statements	
  were	
  approved	
  by	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors	
  on	
  20	
  March	
  2013

.

Signed	
  on	
  behalf	
  of	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors

P	
  J	
  Rasmussen

Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson

53

	
  
	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Parent	
  company	
  statement	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  equity	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  
December	
  2012

Balance	
  at	
  1	
  January	
  2011

5,153

21,237

16,886

3,423

46,699

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Retained	
  
earnings
£’000

Other
reserves
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

Comprehensive	
  income

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year

Total	
  comprehensive	
  expense

Transactions	
  with	
  owners

Employee	
  share	
  option	
  scheme

Other	
  issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

Total	
  transactions	
  with	
  owners

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

98

98

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

885

885

1,243

1,243

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

476

274

750

1,243

1,243

476

1,257

1,733

Balance	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2011

5,251

22,122

18,129

4,173

49,675

Comprehensive	
  income

Profit	
  for	
  the	
  year

Total	
  comprehensive	
  income

Transactions	
  with	
  owners

Employee	
  share	
  option	
  scheme

Share	
  placing

Other	
  issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

Total	
  transactions	
  with	
  owners

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

438

193

631

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

9,546

1,777

11,323

1,974

1,974

-­‐

-­‐

1,974

1,974

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

1,360

-­‐

-­‐

1,360

9,984

1,970

1,360

13,314

Balance	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012

5,882

33,445

20,103

5,533

64,963

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

54

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Parent	
  company	
  cash	
  flow	
  statement	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  operating	
  activities:

Cash	
  outflow	
  from	
  operations

Interest	
  received

Taxation

Net	
  cash	
  used	
  in	
  operating	
  activities

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  investing	
  activities:

Investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction

Net	
  cash	
  used	
  in	
  investing	
  activities

Cash	
  flows	
  from	
  financing	
  activities:

Issues	
  of	
  ordinary	
  share	
  capital

Loans	
  and	
  leases	
  (repaid)

Loans	
  and	
  leases	
  received

Net	
  cash	
  generated	
  from	
  financing	
  activities

Net	
  increase/(decrease)	
  in	
  cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  at	
  1	
  January

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  at	
  31	
  December

The	
  notes	
  on	
  pages	
  56	
  to	
  80	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements.

Note

21

2012
£’000

(10,717)

2,845

75

(7,797)

(3,205)

(3,205)

11,445

-­‐

2,478

13,923

2,921

240

3,161

2011
£’000

(8,453)

2,167

-­‐

(6,286)

-­‐

-­‐

616

-­‐

3,408

4,024

(2,262)

2,502

240

55

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Notes	
  to	
  the	
  financial	
  statements

1.	
  Significant	
  accounting	
  policies

The	
  principal	
  accounting	
  policies	
  adopted	
  in	
  the	
  preparation	
  of	
  these	
  financial	
  statements	
  are	
  set	
  out	
  below.	
  	
  These	
  policies	
  have	
  
been	
  consistently	
  applied	
  to	
  all	
  years	
  presented.

General	
  Information

The	
   company	
   is	
   a	
   public	
   limited	
   company,	
   which	
   is	
   listed	
   on	
   the	
   Alternative	
   Investment	
   Market	
   (AIM)	
   and	
   incorporated	
   and	
  
domiciled	
  in	
  Great	
  Britain.	
  The	
  address	
  of	
  its	
  registered	
  office	
  is	
  Pascal	
  Close,	
  St	
  Mellons,	
  Cardiff,	
  CF3	
  0LW.

Basis	
  of	
  preparation

This	
  financial	
  information	
  has	
  been	
  prepared	
  on	
  a	
   going	
  concern	
  basis	
  under	
  the	
  historical	
  cost	
  convention	
  and	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  
the	
   Companies	
  Act	
  2006	
   applicable	
   to	
  companies	
  reporting	
   under	
  IFRS,	
   International	
  Financial	
  Reporting	
  Standards	
   (“IFRS”)	
   as	
  
adopted	
  by	
   the	
  European	
  Union	
  and	
  IFRIC	
  interpretations	
  expected	
  to	
  be	
   in	
  issue	
   at	
   31	
  December	
  2012.	
   	
  The	
   application	
  of	
  these	
  
standards	
  and	
  interpretations	
  necessitates	
  the	
   use	
   of	
  estimates	
  and	
  judgements.	
   	
  The	
   main	
  areas	
  involving	
  estimates	
  are	
   set	
  out	
  
below	
  in	
  note	
  2.	
  

Changes	
  in	
  accounting	
  policy	
  and	
  disclosures

a)	
  New	
  and	
  amended	
  standards	
  adopted	
  by	
  the	
  group

There	
   are	
  no	
  IFRSs	
  or	
  IFRIC	
  interpretations	
  that	
  are	
   effective	
  for	
  the	
  first	
  time	
  for	
  the	
  financial	
  year	
  beginning	
  on	
  or	
  after	
  1	
  January	
  
2012	
  that	
  would	
  be	
  expected	
  to	
  have	
  a	
  material	
  impact	
  on	
  the	
  group.

b)	
  New	
  standards,	
  amendments	
  and	
  interpretations	
  issued	
  but	
  not	
   effective	
  for	
   the	
  financial	
   year	
  beginning	
   1	
  January	
  2012	
  and	
  not	
  
early	
  adopted

A	
  number	
  of	
   new	
   standards	
  and	
  amendments	
  to	
  standards	
  and	
  interpretations	
  are	
   effective	
  for	
  annual	
  periods	
  beginning	
  after	
  1	
  
January	
  2012,	
  and	
  have	
  not	
  been	
  applied	
  in	
  preparing	
  these	
  consolidated	
  financial	
  statements.	
  None	
  of	
  these	
  are	
  expected	
  to	
  have	
  
a	
  significant	
  effect	
  on	
  the	
  consolidated	
  financial	
  statements	
  of	
  the	
  group.

Basis	
  of	
  consolidation

The	
   consolidated	
   financial	
   statements	
   incorporate	
   the	
   financial	
   statements	
   of	
   the	
   company	
   and	
   its	
   subsidiary	
   undertakings.	
  	
  
Subsidiaries	
   are	
   all	
   entities	
   over	
   which	
   the	
   Group	
   has	
   the	
   power	
   to	
   govern	
   their	
   financial	
   and	
   operating	
   policies	
   generally	
  
accompanying	
  a	
  shareholding	
  of	
  more	
  than	
  half	
  of	
  the	
  voting	
  rights.

Subsidiaries	
  are	
  consolidated	
  from	
  the	
  date	
   on	
  which	
  control	
   is	
  transferred	
  to	
  the	
  Group	
  and	
  are	
   de-­‐consolidated	
  from	
   the	
   date	
  
that	
  control	
  ceases.	
  	
  

Inter-­‐company	
  transactions,	
  balances,	
  income	
  and	
  expenses	
  on	
  transactions	
  between	
  group	
  companies	
  are	
  eliminated.	
  Profits	
  and	
  
losses	
   resulting	
   from	
   intercompany	
   transactions	
   that	
   are	
   recognised	
   in	
   assets	
   are	
   also	
   eliminated.	
   Accounting	
   policies	
   of	
  
subsidiaries	
  have	
   been	
  changed	
  where	
   necessary	
  to	
  ensure	
   consistency	
  with	
  the	
   policies	
  adopted	
  by	
   the	
  group.	
  As	
  permitted	
  by	
  
Section	
  408	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006,	
  the	
  income	
  statement	
  of	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  has	
  not	
  been	
  presented.	
  

Business	
  combinations

The	
  acquisition	
  of	
  subsidiaries	
  is	
  accounted	
  for	
  using	
  the	
  purchase	
  method.	
   	
  The	
  cost	
  of	
  an	
  acquisition	
  is	
  measured	
  at	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  
of	
  the	
   consideration.	
  The	
   acquired	
  identifiable	
   assets,	
   liabilities	
  and	
  contingent	
   liabilities	
  are	
   recognised	
  at	
  their	
  fair	
  value	
  at	
  the	
  
date	
  of	
  acquisition.	
  

Where	
   the	
   fair	
  values	
  of	
  contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration,	
   assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  acquired	
  are	
  initially	
  recognised	
  on	
  a	
  provisional	
  
basis,	
  these	
  are	
   reassessed	
  during	
   the	
   12	
  month	
  period	
  following	
  the	
   date	
   of	
  the	
   business	
  combination.	
   Adjustments	
  to	
  the	
  fair	
  
values	
  as	
  at	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  acquisition	
  within	
  this	
  ‘measurement	
  period’	
  are	
  recorded,	
  with	
  any	
  net	
  impact	
  being	
  added	
  to	
  or	
  deducted	
  
from	
   the	
   goodwill	
   recognised.	
   Such	
   adjustments	
   are	
   recognised	
   in	
   both	
   the	
   current	
   period	
   and	
   restated	
   comparative	
   period	
  
balance	
  sheets	
  as	
  if	
  the	
  final	
  fair	
  values	
  had	
  been	
  used	
  in	
  the	
  initial	
  recognition	
  of	
  the	
  acquisition.

The	
   group	
   recognises	
   any	
   non-­‐controlling	
   interest	
   on	
   an	
   acquisition-­‐by-­‐acquisition	
   basis,	
   either	
   at	
   fair	
   value	
   or	
   at	
   the	
   non-­‐
controlling	
  interest’s	
  proportionate	
  share	
  of	
  the	
  recognised	
  amounts	
  of	
  acquiree’s	
  identifiable	
  net	
  assets.

Acquisition	
  related	
  costs	
  are	
  expensed	
  as	
  incurred.

Intangible	
  assets

a)	
  Goodwill

Goodwill	
  arising	
  on	
  an	
  acquisition	
  is	
  recognised	
  as	
  an	
  asset	
  and	
  initially	
  measured	
  at	
  cost,	
  being	
  the	
  excess	
  of	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
   of	
  the	
  
consideration	
  over	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  identifiable	
  assets,	
  liabilities	
  and	
  contingent	
  liabilities	
  acquired.

Goodwill	
   is	
   not	
   amortised.	
   However,	
   it	
   is	
   reviewed	
   for	
   potential	
   impairment	
   at	
   least	
   annually	
   or	
   more	
   frequently	
   if	
   events	
   or	
  
circumstances	
  indicate	
  a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
   	
  For	
  the	
   purpose	
  of	
  impairment	
  testing,	
  goodwill	
  is	
  allocated	
  to	
  each	
  of	
  the	
   Cash	
  
Generating	
   Units	
   to	
   which	
   is	
   relates.	
   Any	
   impairment	
   identified	
   is	
   charged	
   directly	
   to	
   Consolidated	
   Income	
   Statement.	
  	
  
Subsequent	
  reversals	
  of	
  impairment	
  losses	
  for	
  goodwill	
  are	
  not	
  recognised.

56

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

b)	
  Patents	
  trademarks	
  and	
  licences

Separately	
  acquired	
  patents,	
  trademarks	
  and	
  licences	
  are	
  shown	
  at	
  historical	
  cost.	
  Patents,	
  trademarks	
  and	
  licences	
  acquired	
  in	
  a	
  
business	
  combination	
  are	
  recognised	
  at	
  fair	
  value	
  at	
  the	
  acquisition	
  date.	
  Patents,	
  Trademarks	
  and	
  licences	
  have	
  a	
  finite	
  useful	
  life	
  
and	
  are	
  carried	
  at	
  cost	
  less	
  accumulated	
  amortisation.	
  Amortisation	
  is	
  calculated	
  using	
  the	
  straight-­‐line	
  method	
  to	
  allocate	
  the	
  
cost	
  of	
  trademarks	
  and	
  licences	
  over	
  their	
  estimated	
  useful	
  lives	
  of	
  10	
  to	
  15	
  years.	
  	
  	
  

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  patents,	
  trademarks	
  and	
  licences	
  is	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually,	
  or	
  more	
  frequently	
  if	
  
events	
  or	
  circumstances	
  indicate	
  a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
  	
  Any	
  impairment	
  identified	
  is	
  immediately	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  
Income	
  Statement.

c)	
  Development	
  costs

Expenditure	
   incurred	
  that	
  is	
  directly	
   attributable	
   to	
  the	
   development	
  of	
   new	
   or	
   substantially	
   improved	
  products	
  or	
   processes	
  is	
  
recognised	
  as	
  an	
  intangible	
  asset	
  when	
  the	
  following	
  criteria	
  are	
  met	
  :

•

•

•

•

•

•

the	
  product	
  or	
  process	
  is	
  intended	
  for	
  use	
  or	
  sale;

the	
  development	
  is	
  technically	
  feasible	
  to	
  complete;

there	
  is	
  an	
  ability	
  to	
  use	
  or	
  sell	
  the	
  product	
  or	
  process;

it	
  can	
  be	
  demonstrated	
  how	
  the	
  product	
  or	
  process	
  will	
  generate	
  probable	
  future	
  economic	
  benefits;

there	
  are	
  adequate	
  technical,	
  financial	
  and	
  other	
  resources	
  to	
  complete	
  the	
  development;	
  and

the	
  development	
  expenditure	
  can	
  be	
  reliably	
  measured.

Directly	
   attributable	
   costs	
   refers	
   to	
   the	
   materials	
   consumed;	
   the	
   directly	
   attributable	
   labour;	
   and	
   the	
   incremental	
   overheads	
  
incurred	
  in	
  the	
   development	
  activity.	
   	
  General	
  operating	
  costs,	
  administration	
  costs	
  and	
  selling	
  costs	
  do	
  not	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  directly	
  
attributable	
  costs.	
  	
  	
  	
  	
  

All	
  research	
  and	
  other	
  development	
  costs	
  are	
  expensed	
  as	
  incurred.

Capitalised	
   development	
   costs	
  are	
   amortised	
  on	
   a	
   straight	
   line	
   basis	
  over	
   the	
   period	
   during	
   which	
  the	
   economic	
   benefits	
   are	
  
expected	
  to	
  be	
  received,	
  which	
  typically	
  range	
   between	
  2	
  and	
  5	
  years.	
   	
  The	
  estimated	
  remaining	
  useful	
  lives	
  of	
  development	
  costs	
  
are	
  reviewed	
  at	
  least	
  on	
  an	
  annual	
  basis.

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  capitalised	
  development	
  costs	
  	
  is	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually,	
  or	
  more	
  frequently	
  if	
  
events	
  or	
  circumstances	
  indicate	
  a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
  	
  Any	
  impairment	
  identified	
  is	
  immediately	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  
Income	
  Statement.

d)	
  Software

Directly	
  attributable	
  costs	
  incurred	
  in	
  the	
  development	
  of	
  bespoke	
  software	
  for	
  the	
  group’s	
  own	
  use	
  are	
  capitalised	
  and	
  amortised	
  
on	
  a	
  straight	
  line	
  basis	
  over	
  the	
  expected	
  useful	
  life	
  of	
  the	
  software,	
  which	
  typically	
  range	
  between	
  3	
  and	
  5	
  years.	
  	
  

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  capitalised	
  software	
  costs	
  is	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually,	
  or	
  more	
  frequently	
  if	
  events	
  
or	
  circumstances	
  indicate	
  a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
  Any	
  impairment	
  identified	
  is	
  immediately	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  
Statement.	
  

The	
  costs	
  of	
  maintaining	
  internally	
  developed	
  software,	
  and	
  annual	
  license	
  fees	
  to	
  utilise	
  third	
  party	
  software,	
  are	
  expensed	
  as	
  
incurred.	
  

e)	
  Other	
  intangibles	
  recognised	
  on	
  acquisition

Other	
  intangible	
  assets	
  which	
  form	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  identifiable	
  net	
  assets	
  of	
  an	
  acquired	
  business	
  are	
  recognised	
  at	
  their	
  fair	
  value	
  and	
  
amortised	
  on	
  a	
  systematic	
  basis	
  over	
  their	
  useful	
  economic	
  life,	
  which	
  is	
  up	
  to	
  seven	
  years.

This	
  includes	
  customer	
  contracts,	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  which	
  have	
  been	
  estimated	
  based	
  an	
  imputed	
  royalty	
  stream	
  to	
  recover	
  the	
  
estimated	
  cost	
  of	
  product	
  development	
  and	
  qualification	
  to	
  which	
  the	
  contract	
  relates.

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  other	
  intangible	
  assets	
  	
  is	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually,	
  or	
  more	
  frequently	
  if	
  events	
  or	
  
circumstances	
  indicate	
  a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
  	
  Any	
  impairment	
  identified	
  is	
  immediately	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  
Statement.

57

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment	
  is	
  stated	
  at	
  cost	
  less	
  accumulated	
  depreciation	
  and	
  any	
  provision	
  for	
  impairment.	
  Cost	
  comprises	
  
all	
  costs	
  that	
  are	
  directly	
  attributable	
  to	
  bringing	
  the	
  asset	
  into	
  working	
  condition	
  for	
  its	
  intended	
  use.	
  Depreciation	
  is	
  calculated	
  to	
  
write	
  down	
  the	
  cost	
  of	
  fixed	
  assets	
  to	
  their	
  residual	
  values	
  on	
  a	
  straight-­‐line	
  basis	
  over	
  the	
  following	
  estimated	
  useful	
  economic	
  
lives:

Freehold	
  buildings	
  …………………………………………………..	
  25	
  years
Leasehold	
  improvements	
  ……………………………………..	
  5	
  to	
  27	
  years
Plant	
  and	
  machinery	
  …………………………………………..	
  	
  5	
  to	
  15	
  years
Fixtures	
  and	
  fittings	
  ……………………………………………..	
  	
  4	
  to	
  5	
  years

No	
  depreciation	
  is	
  provided	
  on	
  land	
  or	
  assets	
  yet	
  to	
  be	
  brought	
  into	
  use.

The	
  assets	
  residual	
  values	
  and	
  useful	
  economic	
  lives	
  are	
  reviewed,	
  and	
  adjusted	
  if	
  appropriate,	
  at	
  the	
  end	
  of	
  each	
  reporting	
  period.

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment	
  is	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually.	
  	
  Any	
  impairment	
  
identified	
  is	
  immediately	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement.

Impairment	
  of	
  non-­‐current	
  assets

Non-­‐current	
  assets	
  are	
  reviewed	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment	
  at	
  least	
  annually,	
  or	
  more	
  frequently	
  if	
  events	
  or	
  circumstances	
  indicate	
  
a	
  potential	
  impairment.	
  	
  An	
  impairment	
  loss	
  is	
  recognised	
  for	
  the	
  amount	
  by	
  which	
  the	
  asset’s	
  carrying	
  amount	
  exceeds	
  its	
  
recoverable	
  amount.	
  	
  The	
  recoverable	
  amount	
  is	
  the	
  higher	
  of	
  an	
  asset’s	
  fair	
  value	
  (less	
  disposal	
  costs)	
  and	
  value	
  in	
  use.

Value	
  in	
  use	
  is	
  based	
  on	
  the	
  present	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  future	
  cash	
  flows	
  relating	
  to	
  the	
  asset,	
  discounted	
  at	
  the	
  Group’s	
  weighted	
  
average	
  cost	
  of	
  capital.	
  	
  For	
  the	
  purpose	
  of	
  assessing	
  impairment,	
  assets	
  are	
  grouped	
  at	
  the	
  lowest	
  levels	
  for	
  which	
  there	
  are	
  
separately	
  identifiable	
  cash	
  flows	
  (Cash	
  Generating	
  Units).

Inventories

Inventories	
  are	
  stated	
  at	
  the	
  lower	
  of	
  cost	
  and	
  net	
  realisable	
  value.	
  	
  Cost	
  is	
  determined	
  using	
  the	
  first-­‐in,	
  first-­‐out	
  (FIFO)	
  method.	
  
Cost	
  comprises	
  direct	
  materials	
  and,	
  where	
  applicable,	
  direct	
  labour	
  costs	
  and	
  attributable	
  overheads	
  that	
  have	
  been	
  incurred	
  in	
  
bringing	
  the	
  inventories	
  to	
  their	
  present	
  location	
  and	
  condition	
  based	
  on	
  normal	
  operating	
  capacity.	
  Net	
  realisable	
  value	
  is	
  the	
  
estimated	
  selling	
  price	
  in	
  the	
  ordinary	
  course	
  of	
  business,	
  less	
  applicable	
  variable	
  selling	
  expenses.

Trade	
  receivables

Trade	
  receivables	
  are	
  amounts	
  due	
  from	
  customers	
  for	
  merchandise	
  sold	
  or	
  services	
  performed	
  in	
  the	
  ordinary	
  course	
  of	
  business.	
  
If	
  collection	
  is	
  expected	
  in	
  one	
  year	
  or	
  less	
  (or	
  in	
  the	
  normal	
  operating	
  cycle	
  of	
  the	
  business	
  if	
  longer),	
  they	
  are	
  classified	
  as	
  current	
  
assets.	
  If	
  not,	
  they	
  are	
  presented	
  as	
  non-­‐current	
  assets.

Trade	
  receivables	
  are	
  recognised	
  initially	
  at	
  fair	
  value	
  and	
  subsequently	
  measured	
  at	
  amortised	
  cost	
  using	
  the	
  effective	
  interest	
  
method,	
  less	
  provision	
  for	
  impairment.

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

In	
  the	
  consolidated	
  statement	
  of	
  cash	
  flows,	
  cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  includes	
  cash	
  in	
  hand,	
  deposits	
  held	
  at	
  call	
  with	
  banks,	
  
other	
  short-­‐term	
  highly	
  liquid	
  investments	
  with	
  original	
  maturities	
  of	
  three	
  months	
  or	
  less	
  and	
  bank	
  overdrafts.	
  In	
  the	
  
consolidated	
  balance	
  sheet,	
  bank	
  overdrafts	
  are	
  shown	
  within	
  borrowings	
  in	
  current	
  liabilities.

Trade	
  payables

Trade	
  payables	
  are	
  obligations	
  to	
  pay	
  for	
  goods	
  or	
  services	
  that	
  have	
  been	
  acquired	
  in	
  the	
  ordinary	
  course	
  of	
  business	
  from	
  
suppliers.	
  Accounts	
  payable	
  are	
  classified	
  as	
  current	
  liabilities	
  if	
  payment	
  is	
  due	
  within	
  one	
  year	
  or	
  less	
  (or	
  in	
  the	
  normal	
  operating	
  
cycle	
  of	
  the	
  business	
  if	
  longer).	
  If	
  not,	
  they	
  are	
  presented	
  as	
  non-­‐current	
  liabilities.	
  

Trade	
  payables	
  are	
  recognised	
  initially	
  at	
  fair	
  value	
  and	
  subsequently	
  measured	
  at	
  amortised	
  cost	
  using	
  the	
  effective	
  interest	
  
method.

58

	
  
	
  
	
  
	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Financial	
  instruments

Financial	
  assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  are	
  recognised	
  on	
  the	
  group’s	
  balance	
  sheet	
  when	
  the	
  group	
  becomes	
  a	
  party	
  to	
  the	
  contractual	
  
provisions	
  of	
  the	
  financial	
  instrument.

The	
  financial	
  assets	
  held	
  by	
  the	
  group	
  are	
  other	
  equity	
  investments,	
  receivables	
  and	
  cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents.	
  Receivables	
  do	
  not	
  
carry	
  interest	
  and	
  are	
  stated	
  at	
  their	
  nominal	
  value	
  as	
  reduced	
  by	
  appropriate	
  allowances	
  for	
  estimated	
  irrecoverable	
  amounts.	
  
Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalent	
  comprise	
  cash	
  in	
  hand.	
  Other	
  equity	
  investments	
  are	
  held	
  at	
  cost	
  less	
  provision	
  for	
  impairment.

Financial	
  liabilities	
  and	
  equity	
  instruments	
  are	
  classified	
  according	
  to	
  the	
  substance	
  of	
  the	
  contractual	
  arrangements	
  entered	
  into.	
  
An	
  equity	
  instrument	
  is	
  any	
  contract	
  that	
  evidences	
  a	
  residual	
  interest	
  in	
  the	
  assets	
  of	
  the	
  Group	
  after	
  deducting	
  all	
  of	
  its	
  liabilities.	
  
Trade	
  payables	
  are	
  stated	
  at	
  their	
  nominal	
  value	
  and	
  do	
  not	
  bear	
  interest.

Equity	
  instruments	
  issued	
  by	
  the	
  company	
  are	
  recorded	
  at	
  the	
  proceeds	
  received	
  net	
  of	
  any	
  direct	
  issue	
  costs.

Interest	
  bearing	
  loans	
  are	
  recorded	
  at	
  the	
  proceeds	
  received	
  net	
  of	
  any	
  direct	
  issue	
  costs.	
  Finance	
  charges	
  are	
  accounted	
  for	
  on	
  an	
  
accrual	
  basis	
  using	
  the	
  effective	
  interest	
  method.

The	
  group	
  does	
  not	
  use	
  derivative	
  financial	
  instruments	
  for	
  speculative	
  purposes.	
  	
  The	
  group	
  uses	
  forward	
  currency	
  contracts	
  as	
  
appropriate	
  to	
  manage	
  foreign	
  exchange	
  risk.

Detailed	
  disclosures	
  of	
  the	
  group’s	
  financial	
  instruments	
  are	
  provided	
  in	
  notes	
  15	
  and	
  16.

Leases

Leases	
  which	
  transfer	
  substantially	
  all	
  the	
  risks	
  and	
  rewards	
  of	
  ownership	
  of	
  an	
  asset	
  are	
  treated	
  as	
  a	
  finance	
  lease.	
  	
  Assets	
  held	
  
under	
  finance	
  leases	
  are	
  capitalised	
  at	
  their	
  fair	
  value	
  at	
  the	
  inception	
  of	
  the	
  lease	
  and	
  depreciated	
  over	
  the	
  estimated	
  useful	
  
economic	
  life	
  of	
  the	
  asset	
  or	
  lease	
  term	
  if	
  shorter.	
  	
  The	
  finance	
  charges	
  are	
  allocated	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement	
  in	
  
proportion	
  to	
  the	
  capital	
  amount	
  outstanding.

All	
  other	
  leases	
  are	
  classified	
  as	
  operating	
  leases.	
  Operating	
  lease	
  rentals	
  are	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement	
  in	
  
equal	
  annual	
  amounts	
  over	
  the	
  lease	
  term.	
  	
  	
  

Revenue	
  recognition

Revenue	
  represents	
  the	
  amounts	
  receivable	
  for	
  goods	
  and	
  services	
  provided	
  in	
  the	
  ordinary	
  course	
  of	
  business	
  net	
  of	
  value	
  added	
  
tax	
  and	
  other	
  sales	
  related	
  taxes.	
  Revenue	
  is	
  recognised	
  when	
  the	
  risks	
  and	
  rewards	
  of	
  the	
  underlying	
  sale	
  have	
  been	
  transferred	
  
to	
  the	
  customer,	
  which	
  is	
  on	
  the	
  delivery	
  of	
  the	
  goods	
  or	
  services	
  and	
  acceptance	
  by	
  the	
  customer.

Accrued	
  income	
  is	
  recognised	
  for	
  sales	
  where,	
  at	
  the	
  balance	
  sheet	
  date,	
  billing	
  has	
  not	
  yet	
  taken	
  place	
  but	
  contractual	
  terms	
  
dictate	
  that	
  the	
  risks	
  and	
  rewards	
  have	
  been	
  transferred	
  to	
  the	
  customer	
  and	
  the	
  customer	
  is	
  committed	
  to	
  payment.	
  Billing	
  is	
  
deferred	
  to	
  a	
  contractually	
  defined	
  trigger	
  point.

An	
  acquisition	
  was	
  made	
  during	
  the	
  year,	
  where	
  the	
  consideration	
  is	
  being	
  settled	
  through	
  agreed	
  contractual	
  price	
  discounts.	
  The	
  
revenues	
  of	
  products	
  which	
  are	
  subject	
  to	
  this	
  discount,	
  are	
  recognised	
  at	
  full	
  market	
  value.	
  On	
  settlement	
  of	
  the	
  transaction,	
  the	
  
discount	
  is	
  applied	
  to	
  reduce	
  the	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  balance.

Segmental	
  reporting

Operating	
  segments	
  are	
  reported	
  in	
  a	
  manner	
  consistent	
  with	
  the	
  internal	
  reporting	
  provided	
  to	
  the	
  Board	
  of	
  Directors,	
  	
  who	
  
oversee	
  the	
  allocation	
  of	
  resources	
  and	
  the	
  assessment	
  of	
  operating	
  segment	
  performance.

A	
  business	
  segment	
  is	
  a	
  group	
  of	
  assets	
  and	
  operations	
  engaged	
  in	
  providing	
  products	
  or	
  services	
  that	
  are	
  subject	
  to	
  risks	
  and	
  
returns	
  that	
  are	
  different	
  from	
  those	
  of	
  other	
  business	
  segments.	
  	
  

A	
  geographical	
  segment	
  is	
  engaged	
  in	
  providing	
  products	
  or	
  services	
  within	
  a	
  particular	
  economic	
  environment	
  that	
  are	
  subject	
  to	
  
risks	
  and	
  returns	
  that	
  are	
  different	
  from	
  those	
  of	
  components	
  operating	
  in	
  other	
  economic	
  environments.

Pension	
  costs

The	
  group	
  operates	
  defined	
  contribution	
  pension	
  schemes.	
  	
  Contributions	
  are	
  charged	
  in	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement	
  as	
  
they	
  become	
  payable	
  in	
  accordance	
  with	
  the	
  rules	
  of	
  the	
  scheme.	
  

59

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Share	
  based	
  payments

The	
  group	
  operates	
  a	
  Share	
  Option	
  Scheme,	
  under	
  which	
  the	
  group	
  receives	
  services	
  from	
  employees	
  as	
  consideration	
  for	
  share	
  
options	
  in	
  IQE	
  plc.	
  	
  The	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  employee	
  services	
  received	
  in	
  exchange	
  for	
  the	
  grant	
  of	
  the	
  options	
  is	
  recognised	
  as	
  an	
  
expense	
  in	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement.	
  The	
  total	
  amount	
  to	
  be	
  expensed	
  is	
  determined	
  by	
  reference	
  to	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  
the	
  options	
  granted	
  including	
  any	
  market	
  performance	
  conditions	
  (for	
  example,	
  an	
  entity's	
  share	
  price);	
  excluding	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  
any	
  service	
  and	
  non-­‐market	
  performance	
  vesting	
  conditions	
  (for	
  example,	
  profitability,	
  sales	
  growth	
  targets	
  and	
  remaining	
  an	
  
employee	
  of	
  the	
  entity	
  over	
  a	
  specified	
  time	
  period)	
  and	
  including	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  any	
  non-­‐vesting	
  conditions	
  (for	
  example,	
  the	
  
requirement	
  for	
  employees	
  to	
  save).

Non-­‐market	
  performance	
  and	
  service	
  conditions	
  are	
  included	
  in	
  assumptions	
  about	
  the	
  number	
  of	
  options	
  that	
  are	
  expected	
  to	
  
vest.	
  The	
  total	
  expense	
  is	
  recognised	
  over	
  the	
  vesting	
  period,	
  which	
  is	
  the	
  period	
  over	
  which	
  all	
  of	
  the	
  specified	
  vesting	
  conditions	
  
are	
  to	
  be	
  satisfied.	
  At	
  the	
  end	
  of	
  each	
  reporting	
  period,	
  the	
  group	
  revises	
  its	
  estimates	
  of	
  the	
  number	
  of	
  options	
  that	
  are	
  expected	
  
to	
  vest	
  based	
  on	
  the	
  non-­‐market	
  vesting	
  conditions.	
  It	
  recognises	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  the	
  revision	
  to	
  original	
  estimates,	
  if	
  any,	
  in	
  the	
  
income	
  statement,	
  with	
  a	
  corresponding	
  adjustment	
  to	
  equity.

When	
  the	
  options	
  are	
  exercised,	
  the	
  company	
  issues	
  new	
  shares.	
  The	
  proceeds	
  received	
  net	
  of	
  any	
  directly	
  attributable	
  transaction	
  
costs	
  are	
  credited	
  to	
  share	
  capital	
  (nominal	
  value)	
  and	
  share	
  premium.	
  The	
  scheme	
  is	
  equity	
  settled.

In	
  the	
  company’s	
  own	
  accounts,	
  the	
  grant	
  of	
  share	
  options	
  to	
  the	
  employees	
  of	
  subsidiary	
  undertakings	
  is	
  treated	
  as	
  a	
  capital	
  
contribution.	
  Specifically,	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  employee	
  services	
  received	
  (measured	
  at	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  grant)	
  is	
  recognised	
  over	
  the	
  
vesting	
  period	
  as	
  an	
  increase	
  to	
  investment	
  in	
  subsidiary	
  undertakings,	
  with	
  a	
  corresponding	
  credit	
  to	
  equity	
  in	
  the	
  parent	
  entity	
  
accounts.

The	
  social	
  security	
  contributions	
  payable	
  in	
  connection	
  with	
  the	
  grant	
  of	
  the	
  share	
  options	
  is	
  considered	
  an	
  integral	
  part	
  of	
  the	
  
grant	
  itself,	
  and	
  the	
  change	
  will	
  be	
  treated	
  as	
  a	
  cash-­‐settled	
  transaction.

Foreign	
  currencies

Items	
  included	
  in	
  the	
  financial	
  statements	
  of	
  each	
  subsidiary	
  are	
  measured	
  using	
  the	
  currency	
  of	
  the	
  primary	
  economic	
  
environment	
  in	
  which	
  the	
  subsidiary	
  operates	
  (“the	
  functional	
  currency”).	
  	
  The	
  consolidated	
  financial	
  statements	
  are	
  presented	
  in	
  
sterling,	
  which	
  is	
  the	
  group’s	
  presentational	
  currency.

Foreign	
  currency	
  transactions	
  are	
  translated	
  into	
  the	
  subsidiaries	
  functional	
  currency	
  at	
  the	
  rates	
  of	
  exchange	
  ruling	
  at	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  
the	
  transaction,	
  or	
  at	
  the	
  forward	
  currency	
  hedged	
  rate	
  where	
  appropriate.	
  	
  Monetary	
  assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  in	
  foreign	
  currencies	
  
are	
  translated	
  into	
  the	
  subsidiaries	
  functional	
  currency	
  at	
  the	
  rates	
  ruling	
  at	
  the	
  balance	
  sheet	
  date.	
  	
  All	
  exchange	
  differences	
  are	
  
taken	
  to	
  the	
  income	
  statement.

The	
  balance	
  sheets	
  of	
  overseas	
  subsidiaries	
  are	
  translated	
  into	
  sterling	
  at	
  the	
  closing	
  rates	
  of	
  exchange	
  at	
  the	
  balance	
  sheet	
  date,	
  
whilst	
  the	
  income	
  statements	
  are	
  translated	
  into	
  sterling	
  at	
  the	
  average	
  rate	
  for	
  the	
  period.	
  	
  The	
  resulting	
  translation	
  differences	
  
are	
  taken	
  directly	
  to	
  reserves.

Foreign	
  exchange	
  gains	
  and	
  losses	
  on	
  the	
  retranslation	
  of	
  foreign	
  currency	
  borrowings	
  that	
  are	
  used	
  to	
  finance	
  overseas	
  
operations	
  are	
  accounted	
  for	
  on	
  the	
  ‘net	
  investment’	
  basis	
  and	
  are	
  recorded	
  directly	
  in	
  reserves	
  provided	
  that	
  the	
  hedge	
  is	
  
‘effective’	
  as	
  defined	
  in	
  IAS	
  39	
  “Financial	
  Instruments	
  :	
  recognition	
  and	
  measurement”.

Taxation

Income	
  tax	
  on	
  the	
  profit	
  or	
  loss	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  comprises	
  current	
  and	
  deferred	
  tax.

Current	
  tax	
  is	
  the	
  expected	
  tax	
  payable	
  on	
  the	
  taxable	
  income	
  for	
  the	
  year	
  using	
  rates	
  substantially	
  enacted	
  at	
  the	
  balance	
  sheet	
  
date,	
  and	
  any	
  adjustments	
  to	
  tax	
  payable	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  prior	
  years.

Amounts	
  receivable	
  from	
  tax	
  authorities	
  in	
  relation	
  to	
  R&D	
  tax	
  relief	
  claims	
  are	
  recognised	
  as	
  a	
  credit	
  within	
  the	
  group's	
  tax	
  
charge.	
  Where	
  amounts	
  are	
  outstanding	
  at	
  the	
  year	
  end	
  and	
  have	
  not	
  been	
  formally	
  agreed,	
  an	
  appropriate	
  estimate	
  of	
  the	
  
amount	
  is	
  included	
  within	
  other	
  receivables.

Deferred	
  tax	
  is	
  provided	
  in	
  full	
  on	
  temporary	
  differences	
  between	
  the	
  carrying	
  amounts	
  of	
  assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  in	
  the	
  financial	
  
statements	
  and	
  the	
  amounts	
  used	
  for	
  taxation	
  purposes.	
  Deferred	
  tax	
  is	
  calculated	
  at	
  the	
  tax	
  rates	
  that	
  have	
  been	
  enacted	
  or	
  
substantially	
  enacted	
  at	
  the	
  balance	
  sheet	
  date.	
  	
  Deferred	
  tax	
  assets	
  are	
  only	
  recognised	
  to	
  the	
  extent	
  that	
  it	
  is	
  probable	
  that	
  
future	
  taxable	
  profits	
  will	
  be	
  available	
  against	
  which	
  deductible	
  temporary	
  differences	
  can	
  be	
  utilised.	
  Deferred	
  tax	
  liabilities	
  are	
  
recognised	
  for	
  taxable	
  temporary	
  differences,	
  unless	
  specifically	
  exempt.	
  

Deferred	
  tax	
  assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  are	
  offset	
  when	
  there	
  is	
  a	
  legally	
  enforceable	
  right	
  to	
  set	
  off	
  current	
  taxation	
  assets	
  against	
  
current	
  taxation	
  liabilities	
  and	
  it	
  is	
  the	
  intention	
  to	
  settle	
  these	
  on	
  a	
  net	
  basis.	
  	
  

Tax	
  is	
  recognised	
  in	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement	
  except	
  to	
  the	
  extent	
  that	
  it	
  relates	
  to	
  items	
  recognised	
  directly	
  in	
  equity,	
  
in	
  which	
  case	
  it	
  is	
  recognised	
  in	
  equity.

60

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Investment	
  in	
  subsidiaries	
  

Investments	
  in	
  subsidiaries	
  are	
  held	
  at	
  cost	
  of	
  investment	
  less	
  provision	
  for	
  impairment	
  in	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  accounts.

Other	
  equity	
  investments

Other	
  equity	
  investments	
  are	
  held	
  at	
  cost	
  less	
  provision	
  for	
  impairment	
  in	
  both	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  and	
  group	
  accounts	
  on	
  the	
  
basis	
  that	
  the	
  Group	
  (and	
  Company)	
  does	
  not	
  have	
  the	
  ability	
  to	
  exert	
  significant	
  influence	
  or	
  control	
  over	
  the	
  strategic	
  and	
  
operating	
  activities	
  of	
  the	
  other	
  equity	
  investments.

2.	
  	
  Critical	
  accounting	
  judgements	
  and	
  key	
  sources	
  of	
  estimation	
  uncertainty
The	
  group’s	
  principal	
  accounting	
  policies	
  are	
  described	
  in	
  note	
  1.	
  	
  The	
  application	
  of	
  these	
  policies	
  necessitates	
  the	
  use	
  of	
  
estimates	
  and	
  judgements	
  in	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  areas.	
  	
  Accordingly,	
  the	
  actual	
  amounts	
  may	
  differ	
  from	
  these	
  estimates.	
  	
  The	
  main	
  
areas	
  involving	
  estimation	
  are	
  set	
  out	
  below:

(a)	
  Impairment	
  of	
  intangible	
  assets

Goodwill	
  on	
  the	
  group’s	
  balance	
  sheet	
  is	
  not	
  subject	
  to	
  amortisation	
  because	
  it	
  is	
  assumed	
  to	
  have	
  an	
  indefinite	
  useful	
  life.	
  	
  	
  In	
  
accordance	
  with	
  IAS	
  36	
  “Impairment	
  of	
  assets”,	
  the	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  goodwill	
  is	
  assessed	
  at	
  least	
  annually	
  for	
  impairment.	
  	
  	
  This	
  
assessment	
  is	
  based	
  on	
  cash	
  flow	
  forecasts.	
  	
  	
  In	
  light	
  of	
  these	
  forecasts	
  the	
  Board	
  has	
  concluded	
  that	
  goodwill	
  is	
  not	
  impaired.

The	
  group	
  capitalises	
  the	
  cost	
  of	
  developing	
  new	
  and	
  substantially	
  improved	
  products	
  and	
  processes	
  if	
  there	
  is	
  a	
  reasonable	
  
expectation	
  of	
  obtaining	
  an	
  appropriate	
  economic	
  return.	
  	
  This	
  necessitates	
  an	
  assessment	
  of	
  the	
  future	
  technical	
  viability	
  and	
  
future	
  commercial	
  benefits	
  of	
  the	
  product	
  or	
  process.	
  	
  The	
  carrying	
  value	
  for	
  each	
  project	
  is	
  assessed	
  for	
  impairment	
  on	
  an	
  on-­‐
going	
  basis.

(b)	
  Impairment	
  of	
  receivables

Trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables	
  are	
  carried	
  at	
  the	
  contractual	
  amount	
  due	
  less	
  any	
  estimated	
  provision	
  for	
  non-­‐recovery.	
  	
  	
  Provision	
  is	
  
made	
  based	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  factors	
  including	
  the	
  age	
  of	
  the	
  receivable,	
  previous	
  collection	
  experience	
  and	
  the	
  financial	
  
circumstances	
  of	
  the	
  counterparty.	
  	
  

(d)	
  Inventory	
  provisions

Inventories	
  are	
  carried	
  at	
  the	
  lower	
  of	
  cost	
  and	
  net	
  realisable	
  value.	
  	
  Provision	
  is	
  made	
  based	
  on	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  factors	
  including	
  the	
  
age	
  of	
  inventories,	
  the	
  risk	
  of	
  obsolescence	
  and	
  the	
  expected	
  future	
  usage.

(e)	
  Acquisition	
  fair	
  values

An	
  assessment	
  is	
  made	
  of	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  purchase	
  consideration	
  and	
  net	
  assets	
  acquired	
  was	
  undertaken	
  for	
  the	
  acquisition	
  
made	
  during	
  2012.	
  	
  The	
  basis	
  of	
  the	
  key	
  judgments	
  made	
  is	
  set	
  out	
  in	
  note	
  17.	
  

(d)	
  Deferred	
  tax	
  assets

Deferred	
  tax	
  assets	
  are	
  only	
  recognised	
  to	
  the	
  extent	
  that	
  it	
  is	
  probable	
  that	
  future	
  taxable	
  profits	
  will	
  be	
  available	
  against	
  which	
  
deductible	
  temporary	
  differences	
  can	
  be	
  utilised.	
  	
  This	
  necessitates	
  an	
  assessment	
  of	
  future	
  trading	
  forecasts	
  for	
  each	
  relevant	
  tax	
  
authority,	
  capital	
  expenditures	
  and	
  the	
  utilisation	
  of	
  tax	
  losses.

61

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

3.	
  Segmental	
  analysis
The	
  board	
  of	
  directors	
  considers	
  that	
  the	
  wireless,	
  photonics	
  and	
  electronics	
  markets	
  are	
  the	
  group’s	
  primary	
  reporting	
  segments.	
  
The	
  board	
  of	
  directors	
  assesses	
  the	
  performance	
  of	
  these	
  operating	
  segments	
  based	
  on	
  their	
  earnings	
  before	
  interest,	
  tax,	
  
depreciation,	
  amortisation	
  and	
  share	
  based	
  payments	
  (EBITDA).	
  

Further	
  detail	
  on	
  the	
  nature	
  of	
  the	
  segments	
  is	
  provided	
  in	
  the	
  Chief	
  Executive’s	
  Review.

2012

Income	
  statement

Revenue

EBITDA
Exceptional	
  items

Share	
  based	
  payments

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating	
  profit/(loss)

Finance	
  costs

Tax

Retained	
  profit

Segment	
  assets

Operating	
  assets

Cash

Total	
  assets

Segment	
  liabilities

Operating	
  liabilities

Borrowings

Total	
  liabilities

Other	
  segmental	
  information

Capital	
  expenditure	
  -­‐	
  intangible	
  assets	
  

Capital	
  expenditure	
  -­‐	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  
equipment

Wireless
£’000

Photonics
£’000

Electronics
£’000

68,962

12,929
(455)

(1,066)

(4,921)

(877)

5,610

18,049

3,732
(115)

(279)

(786)

(612)

1,940

950

(224)
-­‐

(15)

(291)

(6)

(536)

137,040

30,226

4,510

(60,738)

(4,679)

(280)

22,213

31,717

2,558

1,336

998

3

Total
£’000

87,961

16,437
(570)

(1,360)

(5,998)

(1,495)

7,014

(886)

503

6,631

171,776

2,773

174,549

(65,697)

(18,256)

(83,953)

25,769

33,056

Costs	
  not	
  directly	
  attributable	
  to	
  a	
  segment	
  are	
  allocated	
  based	
  on	
  the	
  proportion	
  of	
  revenue	
  attributable	
  to	
  that	
  segment.

Finance	
  costs	
  are	
  not	
  allocated	
  to	
  the	
  segments	
  because	
  treasury	
  is	
  managed	
  centrally.

62

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Wireless
£’000

Photonics
£’000

Electronics
£’000

55,156

10,718
(933)

(3,101)

(820)

5,864

18,551

3,409
(309)

(743)

(300)

2,057

1,611

(172)
(42)

(331)

(3)

(548)

73,108

24,930

3,352

(13,362)

(10,992)

(365)

Total
£’000

75,318

13,955
(1,284)

(4,175)

(1,123)

7,373

(481)

1,551

8,443

101,390

3,233

104,623

(24,719)

(7,154)

(31,873)

2011

Income	
  statement

Revenue

EBITDA
Share	
  based	
  payments

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating	
  profit/(loss)

Finance	
  costs

Tax

Retained	
  profit

Segment	
  assets
Operating	
  assets

Cash

Total	
  assets

Segment	
  liabilities

Operating	
  liabilities

Borrowings

Total	
  liabilities

Other	
  segmental	
  information
Capital	
  expenditure	
  -­‐	
  intangible	
  assets	
  

Capital	
  expenditure	
  -­‐	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  
equipment

1,974

15,604

496

1,549

782

235

3,252

17,388

In	
  the	
  periods	
  set	
  out	
  below,	
  certain	
  customers,	
  all	
  within	
  the	
  Wireless	
  operating	
  segment,	
  accounted	
  for	
  greater	
  than	
  10%	
  of	
  the	
  
Group’s	
  total	
  revenues:

Customer	
  1

Customer	
  2

Customer	
  3	
  

2012
£’000

2012
%	
  revenue

2011
£’000

2011
%	
  revenue

22,364

12,849

7,800

25%

15%

9%

1,804

14,848

7,491

2%

20%

10%

There	
  are	
  no	
  customers	
  in	
  the	
  photonics	
  or	
  electronics	
  segments	
  that	
  accounted	
  for	
  greater	
  than	
  10%	
  of	
  the	
  Group’s	
  total	
  
revenues.

63

	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Geographical	
  information

Disclosure	
  of	
  group	
  revenues	
  by	
  location	
  of	
  customer:

Americas

United	
  States	
  of	
  America

Rest	
  of	
  Americas

Europe,	
  Middle	
  East	
  &	
  Africa	
  (EMEA)

France

Germany

Israel

United	
  Kingdom

Rest	
  of	
  EMEA

Asia	
  Pacific

People’s	
  Republic	
  of	
  China

Japan

Taiwan

Rest	
  of	
  Asia	
  Pacific

Total	
  revenue

Disclosure	
  of	
  non-­‐current	
  assets	
  by	
  location	
  of	
  assets:

By	
  location
USA

Singapore

UK

64

2012
£’000

64,967

64,425

542

5,721

503

1,391

1,042

1,439

1,346

17,273

865

6,006

9,074

1,328

2011
£’000

49,848

48,498

1,350

7,494

426

1,694

2,493

821

2,060

17,976

2,202

6,241

7,758

1,775

87,961

75,318

Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment
Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Intangible	
  assets
Intangible	
  assets

2012
£’000
45,647

11,167

5,506

62,320

2011
£’000
22,558

9,262

5,528

37,348

2012
£’000
36,013

9,041

9,111

54,165

2011
£’000
16,882

8,843

6,981

32,706

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

4.	
  Operating	
  profit

The	
  operating	
  profit	
  is	
  stated	
  after	
  charging/(crediting):

Depreciation	
  of	
  	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Amortisation	
  of	
  non-­‐current	
  intangible	
  assets

Gain	
  on	
  sale	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Services	
  provided	
  by	
  auditors

Operating	
  lease	
  rentals

Research	
  and	
  development

Exchange	
  losses

Cost	
  of	
  inventories	
  consumed

Exceptional	
  items

2012
£’000

5,998

1,495

-­‐

178

2,511

143

(258)

34,110

570

2011
£’000

4,175

1,123

(68)

113

2,158

107

26

30,822

-­‐

A	
  schedule	
  of	
  services	
  provided	
  by	
  the	
  group’s	
  auditors	
  is	
  disclosed	
  in	
  the	
  Corporate	
  Governance	
  Report.

Exceptional	
  items	
  relate	
  to	
  the	
  transaction	
  costs	
  expensed	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  in	
  relation	
  to	
  acquisitions	
  and	
  debt	
  and	
  equity	
  fund	
  
raising.

5.	
  

Employee	
  costs

Employee	
  costs	
  (including	
  directors’	
  remuneration)

Wages	
  and	
  salaries

Social	
  security	
  costs

Other	
  pension	
  costs

Charge	
  for	
  share	
  based	
  payments

Average	
  number	
  of	
  employees	
  (including	
  directors)

Cost	
  of	
  sales

Selling,	
  general	
  and	
  administrative

2012
£’000

18,593

2,051

904

1,360

22,908

2011
£’000

15,541

1,952

729

1,284

19,506

2012
Number

2011
Number

389

90

479

311

95

406

Directors’	
  emoluments	
  and	
  share	
  option	
  details	
  are	
  disclosed	
  in	
  the	
  Remuneration	
  Report.	
  	
  	
  Key	
  management	
  within	
  the	
  group	
  
comprises	
  the	
  executive	
  and	
  non-­‐executive	
  directors	
  and	
  the	
  general	
  managers	
  of	
  the	
  subsidiaries.	
  	
  Compensation	
  to	
  key	
  
management,	
  including	
  pensions	
  of	
  £83,000	
  (2011:	
  £75,000),	
  was	
  £2,132,000	
  (2011:	
  £1,987,000)	
  and	
  the	
  charge	
  for	
  share-­‐based	
  
payments	
  was	
  £230,000	
  (2011:	
  £594,000).

65

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

6.	
  Finance	
  costs

Bank	
  and	
  other	
  loans

Finance	
  lease	
  interest

Unwind	
  of	
  discount	
  on	
  long	
  term	
  balances

7.	
  Taxation

Current	
  tax	
  credit

United	
  Kingdom	
  research	
  and	
  development	
  tax	
  credits	
  receivable

Overseas	
  taxes	
  receivable/(payable)

Total	
  current	
  tax	
  credit

Deferred	
  tax	
  (charge)/credit

Total	
  tax	
  credit

Factors	
  affecting	
  total	
  tax	
  credit

2012
£’000

588

29

269

886

2012
£’000

501

10

511

(8)

503

2011
£’000

408

73

-­‐

481

2011
£’000

568

(58)

510

1,041

1,551

The	
  tax	
  credit	
  assessed	
  for	
  the	
  period	
  is	
  different	
  from	
  that	
  resulting	
  from	
  applying	
  the	
  standard	
  rate	
  of	
  corporation	
  tax	
  in	
  the	
  UK:	
  
24.5%	
  (2011:	
  26.5%).	
  	
  	
  The	
  differences	
  are	
  explained	
  below:	
  	
  

Profit	
  on	
  ordinary	
  activities	
  before	
  taxation

2012
£’000

6,128

2011
£’000

6,892

Tax	
  charge	
  at	
  24.5%	
  thereon	
  (2011:	
  26.5%)

(1,501)

(1,826)

Effects	
  of	
  :

Expenses	
  not	
  deductible	
  for	
  tax	
  purposes

Overseas	
  tax	
  rate	
  differences

Decrease/(Increase)	
  in	
  unrecognised	
  tax	
  losses

Other	
  deferred	
  tax	
  movements

United	
  Kingdom	
  research	
  and	
  development	
  tax	
  credits	
  receivable

Total	
  tax	
  credit	
  for	
  the	
  year

(63)

375

423

768

501

503

(48)

530

(1,008)

3,335

568

1,551

On	
  21	
  March	
  2012	
  the	
  UK	
  Government	
  announced	
  a	
  reduction	
  in	
  the	
  rate	
  of	
  corporation	
  tax	
  to	
  24%	
  with	
  effect	
  from	
  1	
  April	
  2012.	
  In	
  
addition,	
  the	
  Finance	
  Act	
  2012,	
  which	
  passed	
  into	
  law	
  on	
  3	
  July	
  2012	
  included	
  legislation	
  to	
  reduce	
  the	
  main	
  rate	
  of	
  corporation	
  tax	
  
from	
  24%	
  to	
  23%	
  with	
  effect	
  from	
  1	
  April	
  2013.

The	
  proposed	
  further	
  reduction	
  in	
  the	
  UK	
  corporation	
  tax	
  rate	
  by	
  2%	
  to	
  21%	
  from	
  1	
  April	
  2014	
  is	
  expected	
  to	
  be	
  enacted	
  
separately;	
  the	
  effect	
  of	
  this	
  change	
  on	
  deferred	
  tax	
  cannot	
  be	
  reliably	
  quantified	
  at	
  this	
  stage.

66

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Deferred	
  tax	
  asset

At	
  1	
  January

Deferred	
  tax	
  (expense)/credit	
  recognised	
  in	
  the	
  year

Deferred	
  tax	
  assets	
  recognised	
  on	
  acquisition

Foreign	
  exchange	
  differences

At	
  31	
  December

2012
£’000

1,876

(8)

13,188

(507)

14,549

2011
£’000

824

1,041

-­‐

11

1,876

The	
  deferred	
  income	
  tax	
  asset	
  recognised	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  of	
  £14,549,000	
  (2011:	
  £1,876,000)	
  relates	
  mainly	
  to	
  timing	
  
differences	
  on	
  fair	
  value	
  adjustments	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  the	
  acquisition	
  set	
  out	
  in	
  note	
  17,	
  as	
  well	
  as	
  an	
  element	
  of	
  tax	
  losses	
  carried	
  
forward	
  and	
  accelerated	
  depreciation.	
  These	
  are	
  recognised	
  to	
  the	
  extent	
  that	
  the	
  realisation	
  of	
  the	
  related	
  tax	
  benefit	
  through	
  
future	
  taxable	
  profits	
  from	
  the	
  same	
  trade	
  is	
  probable.	
  The	
  group	
  currently	
  benefits	
  from	
  a	
  0%	
  tax	
  rate	
  on	
  trading	
  income	
  arising	
  in	
  
Singapore.	
  	
  

The	
  net	
  amount	
  not	
  recognised	
  is	
  an	
  asset	
  of	
  £25,036,000	
  (2011:	
  £26,691,000).	
  Tax	
  losses	
  carried	
  forward	
  account	
  for	
  an	
  asset	
  of	
  
£31,228,000	
  (2011:	
  £31,651,000).	
  The	
  remaining	
  unrecognised	
  amounts	
  relating	
  to	
  a	
  mix	
  of	
  temporary	
  timing	
  differences	
  including	
  
accelerated	
  depreciation	
  and	
  income	
  tax	
  deductions	
  receivable	
  on	
  the	
  exercise	
  of	
  employee	
  share	
  options.	
  The	
  asset	
  would	
  be	
  
recognised	
  if	
  sufficient	
  profits	
  from	
  the	
  same	
  trade	
  arise	
  in	
  future	
  periods.

8.	
  Dividends

No	
  dividend	
  has	
  been	
  paid	
  or	
  proposed	
  in	
  2012	
  (2011:	
  £nil).

9.	
  Earnings	
  per	
  share

Basic	
  earnings	
  per	
  share	
  is	
  calculated	
  by	
  dividing	
  the	
  profit	
  attributable	
  to	
  ordinary	
  shareholders	
  by	
  the	
  weighted	
  average	
  number	
  
of	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  in	
  issue	
  during	
  the	
  year.	
  	
  

Diluted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share	
  is	
  calculated	
  by	
  dividing	
  the	
  profit	
  attributable	
  to	
  ordinary	
  shareholders	
  by	
  the	
  weighted	
  average	
  
number	
  of	
  shares	
  and	
  ‘in	
  the	
  money’	
  share	
  options	
  in	
  issue.	
  Share	
  options	
  are	
  classified	
  as	
  ‘in	
  the	
  money’	
  if	
  their	
  exercise	
  price	
  is	
  
lower	
  than	
  the	
  average	
  share	
  price	
  for	
  the	
  year.	
  As	
  required	
  by	
  IAS	
  33,	
  this	
  calculation	
  assumes	
  that	
  the	
  proceeds	
  receivable	
  from	
  
the	
  exercise	
  of	
  ‘in	
  the	
  money’	
  options	
  would	
  be	
  used	
  to	
  purchase	
  shares	
  in	
  the	
  open	
  market	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  reduce	
  the	
  number	
  of	
  new	
  
shares	
  that	
  would	
  need	
  to	
  be	
  issued.	
  	
  

The	
  directors	
  also	
  present	
  an	
  adjusted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share	
  measure	
  which	
  eliminates	
  certain	
  non-­‐cash	
  items	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  provide	
  a	
  
more	
  meaningful	
  underlying	
  profit	
  measure.	
  	
  Specifically,	
  the	
  non-­‐cash	
  accounting	
  charges	
  eliminated	
  are:

• financing	
  charges	
  relating	
  to	
  discounting	
  of	
  long	
  term	
  acquisition	
  balances;
• amortisation	
  of	
  intangibles	
  arising	
  on	
  acquisition;
• share	
  based	
  payments;	
  and
• exceptional	
  items.

Profit	
  attributable	
  to	
  ordinary	
  shareholders

Exceptional	
  items

Discounting	
  of	
  long	
  term	
  acquisition	
  related	
  balances	
  

Amortisation	
  of	
  acquired	
  intangibles

Share	
  based	
  payments

Adjusted	
  profit	
  attributable	
  to	
  ordinary	
  shareholders

2012
£’000
6,631

570

269

258

1,360

9,088

2011
£’000
8,443

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

1,284

9,727

67

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Weighted	
  average	
  number	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

Dilutive	
  share	
  options

2012
Number
571,972,538

29,715,163

2011
Number
522,386,930

37,008,723

Adjusted	
  weighted	
  average	
  number	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares

601,687,701

559,395,653

Adjusted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

Earnings	
  per	
  share

Adjusted	
  diluted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

Diluted	
  earnings	
  per	
  share

10.	
  Intangible	
  assets

The	
  Group

Cost

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Additions	
  

NanoGaN	
  adjustment	
  (see	
  below)

Acquisitions	
  (note	
  17)

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Charge	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

1.86p

1.62p

1.74p

1.51p

Total
£’000

37,168

4,366

(1,078)

21,403

(1,897)

1.59p

1.16p

1.51p

1.10p

Goodwill
£’000

Patents
£’000

Development
Development
	
  costs
	
  costs
£’000
£’000

Software
Software
£’000
£’000

Acquisition	
  
intangibles
£’000

19,823

-­‐

(478)

18,287

(1,267)

36,365

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

36,365

19,823

305

88

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

16,098
16,098

4,042
4,042

(600)
(600)

-­‐-­‐

(458)
(458)

942942

219219

-­‐-­‐

-­‐-­‐

(1)(1)

-­‐

17

-­‐

3,116

(171)

393

19,082
19,082

1,160
1,160

2,962

59,962

26

30

-­‐

56

337

279

4,092
4,092

1,188
1,188

(145)
(145)

5,135
5,135

13,947
13,947

12,006
12,006

344344

1919

(3)(3)

360360

800800

598598

-­‐

258

(12)

246

4,462

1,495

(160)

5,797

2,716

54,165

-­‐

32,706

The	
  NanoGaN	
  adjustment	
  relates	
  to	
  the	
  reduction	
  in	
  the	
  estimated	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  payable.

68

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

The	
  Group

Cost

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011
Additions	
  

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment
Accumulated	
  amortisation	
  and	
  impairment

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011

Charge	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

At	
  31	
  December	
  2010

Goodwill
£’000

Patents
£’000

Development
Development
	
  costs
	
  costs
£’000
£’000

Software
Software
£’000
£’000

Acquisition	
  
intangibles
£’000

19,674
-­‐

149

19,823

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

19,823

19,674

222
83

-­‐

305

11

15

-­‐

26

279

211

13,097
13,097
2,924
2,924

7777

16,098
16,098

3,076
3,076

966966

5050

4,092
4,092

12,006
12,006

10,021
10,021

697697
245245

-­‐-­‐

942942

202202

142142

-­‐-­‐

344344

598598

495495

-­‐
-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

Total
£’000

33,690
3,252

226

37,168

3,289	
  

1,123

50

4,462	
  

32,706

30,401

The	
  amortisation	
  charge	
  of	
  :	
  £1,495,000	
  (2011:	
  £1,123,000)	
  has	
  been	
  charged	
  to	
  selling,	
  general	
  and	
  administrative	
  expenses	
  in	
  the	
  
Consolidated	
  Income	
  Statement.

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  deferred	
  development	
  costs	
  continue	
  to	
  be	
  supported	
  by	
  forecast	
  cash	
  flows.	
  
The	
  NanoGaN	
  adjustment	
  shown	
  above	
  relates	
  to	
  a	
  reduction	
  in	
  the	
  estimated	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  payable.

Impairment	
  tests	
  for	
  goodwill

Goodwill	
  is	
  allocated	
  to	
  the	
  group’s	
  cash	
  generating	
  units	
  (CGUs)	
  identified	
  according	
  to	
  operating	
  segment.	
  An	
  operating	
  
segment	
  level	
  summary	
  of	
  the	
  goodwill	
  allocation	
  is	
  presented	
  below:

Allocation	
  of	
  goodwill	
  by	
  operating	
  segment

Wireless

Photonics

Total	
  Goodwill

2012
£’000

29,379

6,986

36,365

2011
£’000

12,070

7,753

19,823

Multiple	
  production	
  facilities	
  can	
  be	
  included	
  in	
  a	
  single	
  CGU	
  reflecting	
  that	
  production	
  can	
  (and	
  is)	
  transferred	
  between	
  sites	
  to	
  
suit	
  capacity	
  planning	
  and	
  operational	
  efficiency.

The	
  recoverable	
  amount	
  of	
  all	
  CGUs	
  has	
  been	
  determined	
  based	
  on	
  value	
  in	
  use	
  calculations,	
  using	
  	
  pre-­‐tax	
  cash	
  flow	
  projections	
  
for	
  a	
  five	
  year	
  period.	
  	
  The	
  Board	
  approved	
  budget	
  is	
  used	
  for	
  the	
  first	
  year	
  of	
  the	
  forecast.	
  	
  Beyond	
  this	
  the	
  Board	
  has	
  used	
  
assumptions	
  which	
  are	
  below	
  expectations	
  in	
  order	
  to	
  “stress	
  test”	
  for	
  potential	
  impairment,	
  namely	
  :	
  revenue	
  growth	
  5%	
  pa;	
  
margin	
  erosion	
  1%	
  pa,	
  cost	
  inflation	
  3%.	
  	
  A	
  pre-­‐tax	
  discount	
  rate	
  of	
  11%	
  (2011:	
  10%)	
  has	
  been	
  used	
  in	
  these	
  calculations,	
  which	
  
management	
  believe	
  is	
  appropriate	
  for	
  each	
  CGU	
  given	
  that	
  they	
  have	
  similar	
  risk	
  profiles	
  and	
  common	
  funding.	
  

Even	
  on	
  this	
  “stressed”	
  basis,	
  there	
  remains	
  a	
  significant	
  level	
  of	
  headroom	
  in	
  the	
  calculations.	
  	
  In	
  addition,	
  to	
  test	
  the	
  sensitivity	
  of	
  
the	
  discount	
  rate,	
  if	
  a	
  15%	
  discount	
  rate	
  is	
  used	
  there	
  is	
  still	
  no	
  impairment	
  of	
  assets.

69

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

11.	
  Property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Short
leasehold
improve-­‐
ments
£’000

Land	
  and	
  
buildings
£’000

Fixtures
and	
  fittings
£’000

Plant	
  and
machinery
£’000

6,393

15

-­‐

-­‐

(110)

6,298

2,802

-­‐

151

(15)

11,284

225

13,032

-­‐

(887)

23,654

9,955

-­‐

799

(214)

2,938

10,540

3,360

3,591

13,114

1,329

Short
leasehold
improve-­‐
ments
£’000

10,762

925

(685)

282

Land	
  and
buildings
£’000

6,344

12

-­‐

37

6,393

11,284

2,646

-­‐

149

7

2,802

3,591

3,698

10,444

(685)

168

28

9,955

1,329

318

2,398

107

-­‐

(2)

(54)

2,449

2,133

(2)

104

(50)

2,185

264

265

112,248

12,709

6,968

(228)

(3,090)

128,607

80,085

(228)

4,944

(1,776)

83,025

45,582

32,163

Fixtures
and	
  fittings
£’000

Plant	
  and
machinery
£’000

2,387

143

(184)

52

2,398

2,202

(184)

97

18

2,133

265

185

100,130

16,308

(4,810)

620

112,248

80,527

(4,788)

3,761

585

80,085

32,163

19,603

Total
£’000

132,323

13,056

20,000

(230)

(4,141)

161,008

94,975

(230)

5,998

(2,055)

98,688

62,320

37,348

Total
£’000

119,623

17,388

(5,679)

991

132,323

95,819

(5,657)

4,175

638

94,975

37,348

23,804

a)	
  	
  The	
  Group

Cost	
  	
  

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Additions

Acquisitions	
  (note	
  17)

Disposals

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Accumulated	
  depreciation

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Disposals

Charge	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

b)	
  	
  The	
  Group

Cost	
  	
  

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011

Additions

Disposals

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Accumulated	
  depreciation

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011

Disposals

Charge	
  for	
  the	
  year

Foreign	
  exchange

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

At	
  31	
  December	
  2010

70

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

c) Capitalised	
  finance	
  leases
c) Capitalised	
  finance	
  leases
c) Capitalised	
  finance	
  leases
Plant	
  and	
  machinery	
  includes	
  the	
  following	
  amounts	
  where	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  a	
  lessee	
  under	
  a	
  finance	
  lease:
Plant	
  and	
  machinery	
  includes	
  the	
  following	
  amounts	
  where	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  a	
  lessee	
  under	
  a	
  finance	
  lease:
Plant	
  and	
  machinery	
  includes	
  the	
  following	
  amounts	
  where	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  a	
  lessee	
  under	
  a	
  finance	
  lease:

Cost

Accumulated	
  depreciation

Net	
  book	
  value

2012
£‘000

2,576

(46)

2,530

2011
£’000

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

The	
  group	
  leases	
  various	
  plant	
  and	
  machinery	
  assets	
  under	
  non-­‐cancellable	
  finance	
  lease	
  agreements.	
  The	
  lease	
  terms	
  are	
  up	
  to	
  
three	
  years,	
  and	
  the	
  ownership	
  of	
  the	
  assets	
  lie	
  within	
  the	
  group.

12.	
  Investments

a)	
  Company

Cost

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  Corporation	
  (note	
  12b)

Adjustment	
  to	
  NanoGaN	
  Limited	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  (note	
  10)

Subsidiaries	
  share	
  based	
  payments	
  charge

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Accumulated	
  amortisation

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012	
  and	
  31	
  December	
  2012

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2012

At	
  1	
  January	
  2012

Cost

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011

Adjustment	
  to	
  NanoGaN	
  Limited	
  deferred	
  consideration

Subsidiaries	
  share	
  based	
  payments	
  charge

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Accumulated	
  amortisation

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011	
  and	
  31	
  December	
  2011

Net	
  book	
  value

At	
  31	
  December	
  2011

At	
  1	
  January	
  2011

Details	
  of	
  principal	
  subsidiaries	
  are	
  set	
  out	
  in	
  note	
  24.

Investments	
  in	
  
subsidiaries
£’000

Other	
  equity	
  
investments
£’000

Total	
  
£’000

84,125

3,205

(1,078)

329

-­‐

3,205

-­‐

-­‐

3,205

86,581

84,125

-­‐

(1,078)

329

83,376

70,438

-­‐

70,438

12,938

13,687

3,205

-­‐

16,143

13,687

Investments	
  in	
  
subsidiaries
£’000

Other	
  equity	
  
investments
£’000

84,676

(750)

199

84,125

70,438

13,687

14,238

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

-­‐

Total	
  
£’000

84,676

(750)

199

84,125

70,438

13,687

14,238

71

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

b)	
  Group

On	
  8	
  February	
  2012,	
  the	
  Group	
  (and	
  Company)	
  invested	
  £3.2m	
  for	
  a	
  9%	
  equity	
  investment	
  in	
  Solar	
  Junction	
  Corporation	
  (“SJC”),	
  
and	
  contemporaneously	
  entered	
  into	
  an	
  exclusive	
  long	
  term	
  supply	
  contract	
  to	
  supply	
  SJC	
  with	
  advanced	
  semi-­‐conductor	
  
materials	
  for	
  the	
  Concentrated	
  Photovoltaic	
  Market.	
  	
  This	
  investment	
  is	
  accounted	
  for	
  at	
  cost	
  of	
  investment	
  less	
  provision	
  for	
  
impairment	
  on	
  the	
  basis	
  that	
  the	
  Group	
  (and	
  Company)	
  does	
  not	
  have	
  the	
  ability	
  to	
  exert	
  significant	
  influence	
  or	
  control	
  over	
  the	
  
strategic	
  and	
  operating	
  activities	
  of	
  SJC.

13.	
  Inventories

The	
  Group

Raw	
  materials	
  and	
  consumables

Work-­‐in-­‐progress	
  and	
  finished	
  goods

2012

£’000

14,334

4,017

18,351

2011

£’000

12,144

2,978

15,122

The	
  directors	
  are	
  of	
  the	
  opinion	
  that	
  the	
  replacement	
  values	
  of	
  inventories	
  are	
  not	
  materially	
  different	
  to	
  the	
  carrying	
  values	
  
stated	
  above.	
  These	
  carrying	
  values	
  are	
  stated	
  net	
  of	
  impairment	
  provisions	
  of	
  £1,781,000	
  (2011:	
  £1,989,000).

14.	
  Trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables

Trade	
  receivables

Amounts	
  owed	
  by	
  group	
  undertakings

Other	
  receivables	
  and	
  prepayments

2012

Group
£’000

9,870

-­‐

9,316

19,186

2012

Company
£’000

-­‐

56,251

141

56,392

2011

Group
£’000

7,244

-­‐

7,094

14,338

2011

Company
£’000

-­‐

45,991

143

46,134

As	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012,	
  93%	
  (2011:	
  82%)	
  of	
  trade	
  receivables	
  were	
  within	
  terms.	
  	
  Of	
  the	
  other	
  trade	
  receivables,	
  64%	
  (2011:	
  87%)	
  
were	
  less	
  than	
  30	
  days	
  past	
  due.	
  	
  An	
  allowance	
  has	
  been	
  made	
  for	
  estimated	
  irrecoverable	
  amounts	
  from	
  the	
  sale	
  of	
  goods	
  of	
  
£79,000	
  (2011:	
  £135,000).	
  	
  This	
  allowance	
  has	
  been	
  determined	
  by	
  reference	
  to	
  past	
  default	
  experience.	
  Included	
  in	
  other	
  
receivables	
  is	
  accrued	
  income	
  of	
  £7,375,000	
  (2011:	
  £4,531,000).

The	
  carrying	
  values	
  of	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables	
  also	
  represent	
  their	
  estimated	
  fair	
  values.	
  	
  	
  

The	
  maximum	
  exposure	
  to	
  credit	
  risk	
  at	
  the	
  reporting	
  date	
  is	
  the	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  each	
  class	
  of	
  receivable	
  as	
  set	
  out	
  above.	
  	
  In	
  
terms	
  of	
  trade	
  receivables,	
  the	
  terms	
  of	
  sale	
  provide	
  that	
  the	
  group	
  has	
  recourse	
  to	
  the	
  products	
  sold	
  in	
  the	
  event	
  of	
  non-­‐payment	
  
by	
  a	
  customer.

Trade	
  receivables	
  and	
  accrued	
  income	
  are	
  primarily	
  denominated	
  in	
  US	
  dollars,	
  as	
  are	
  trade	
  payables	
  (note	
  15).	
  The	
  natural	
  hedge	
  
between	
  these	
  financial	
  instruments	
  limits	
  the	
  exposure	
  of	
  the	
  group	
  to	
  movements	
  in	
  foreign	
  exchange	
  rates.	
  Based	
  on	
  the	
  
balances	
  held	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  a	
  1	
  cent	
  movement	
  in	
  the	
  US	
  dollar	
  to	
  Sterling	
  rate	
  would	
  impact	
  the	
  net	
  value	
  of	
  these	
  
instruments	
  by	
  £11,000	
  (2011:	
  £6,000)	
  (before	
  the	
  mitigating	
  impact	
  of	
  cash	
  flow	
  hedges).	
  

72

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

15.	
  Trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

Current

Trade	
  payables

Deferred	
  consideration	
  (note	
  17)

Other	
  taxation	
  and	
  social	
  security

Forward	
  foreign	
  exchange	
  contracts	
  (cash	
  flow	
  hedge)

Accruals	
  and	
  deferred	
  income

Non-­‐current

Deferred	
  consideration	
  (note	
  17)

2012

Group
£’000

16,046

10,000

316

-­‐

5,347

31,709

2012

Group
£’000
34,386

2012

Company
£’000

-­‐

-­‐

139

-­‐

545

684

2012

Company
£’000
484

2011

Group
£’000

11,630

6,080

307

246

4,894

23,157

2011

Group
£’000
1,562

2011

Company
£’000

-­‐

-­‐

63

246

1,428

1,737

2011

Company
£’000
1,562

Within	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  is	
  £43.9m	
  being	
  the	
  best	
  estimate	
  of	
  the	
  amount	
  that	
  will	
  be	
  settled	
  through	
  contractually	
  agreed	
  
price	
  discounts	
  over	
  the	
  next	
  four	
  years	
  (as	
  set	
  out	
  in	
  note	
  17).

The	
  carrying	
  values	
  of	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables	
  also	
  represent	
  their	
  estimated	
  fair	
  values.

Forward	
  foreign	
  currency	
  exchange	
  contracts	
  are	
  designated	
  as	
  cash	
  flow	
  hedges	
  against	
  highly	
  probable	
  forecast	
  transactions	
  
denominated	
  in	
  US	
  dollars	
  that	
  are	
  expected	
  to	
  occur	
  at	
  various	
  dates.	
  The	
  amount	
  recognised	
  within	
  payables	
  represents	
  the	
  
mark	
  to	
  market	
  value	
  of	
  these	
  contracts	
  at	
  each	
  reporting	
  date.	
  Movements	
  in	
  the	
  mark	
  to	
  market	
  value	
  are	
  included	
  within	
  other	
  
comprehensive	
  income	
  and	
  other	
  reserves	
  within	
  equity.	
  

16.	
  Borrowings

The	
  Group

Non-­‐current	
  borrowings:

Bank	
  loans

Finance	
  leases

Current	
  borrowings:

Bank	
  loans

Finance	
  leases

Total	
  Borrowings

2012

£’000

14,094

1,734

15,828

1,687

741

2,428

2011

£’000

7,087

18

7,105

-­‐

49

49

18,256

7,154

73

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

a)	
  Bank	
  loans

Bank	
  Borrowings	
  fall	
  due	
  for	
  repayment	
  as	
  follows:

Within	
  one	
  year

Between	
  one	
  and	
  five	
  years

After	
  five	
  years

2012

£’000

1,687

14,094

-­‐

15,781

2011

£’000

-­‐

7,087

-­‐

7,087

The	
  group’s	
  bank	
  loans	
  consist	
  of	
  a	
  series	
  of	
  variable	
  and	
  fixed	
  rate	
  term	
  loans,	
  and	
  a	
  revolving	
  credit	
  facility.

The	
  variable	
  rate	
  term	
  loans,	
  which	
  had	
  principle	
  outstanding	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  of	
  £4.1m	
  (2011	
  :	
  £nil),	
  bear	
  interest	
  of	
  between	
  
2.0%	
  to	
  2.5%	
  over	
  LIBOR.	
  These	
  loans	
  are	
  repayable	
  by	
  monthly	
  installment	
  with	
  remaining	
  terms	
  of	
  up	
  to	
  4	
  years.	
  

The	
  fixed	
  rate	
  term	
  loans,	
  which	
  had	
  principle	
  outstanding	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  of	
  £2.1m	
  (2011	
  :	
  £nil),	
  bear	
  interest	
  of	
  	
  5%	
  until	
  
2017	
  and	
  is	
  variable	
  thereafter.	
  These	
  loans	
  are	
  repayable	
  by	
  monthly	
  installment	
  with	
  remaining	
  terms	
  of	
  up	
  to	
  20	
  years.	
  

The	
  revolving	
  credit	
  facility	
  is	
  a	
  multi-­‐currency	
  facility	
  of	
  up	
  to	
  £21	
  million,	
  committed	
  until	
  2016.	
  	
  It	
  bears	
  interest	
  of	
  between	
  
1.75%	
  to	
  1.95%	
  over	
  LIBOR.	
  The	
  balance	
  drawn	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  was	
  £9.6m	
  (2011	
  :	
  £7.1m).

Bank	
  loans	
  are	
  secured	
  against	
  the	
  assets	
  of	
  the	
  group.

The	
  carrying	
  value	
  of	
  loans	
  approximates	
  to	
  their	
  fair	
  value	
  based	
  on	
  the	
  net	
  present	
  value	
  of	
  future	
  cash	
  flows.

As	
  disclosed	
  in	
  note	
  25,	
  on	
  10	
  January	
  2013	
  the	
  group	
  raised	
  $40m	
  of	
  acquisition	
  finance	
  to	
  part	
  fund	
  the	
  acquisition	
  of	
  Kopin	
  
Wireless.

b)	
  Finance	
  leases

Gross	
  finance	
  lease	
  liabilities	
  –	
  minimum	
  lease	
  payments:

Within	
  one	
  year

Between	
  one	
  and	
  five	
  years

Finance	
  charges

Present	
  value	
  of	
  finance	
  lease	
  liabilities

Present	
  value	
  of	
  finance	
  lease	
  liabilities:

Within	
  one	
  year

Between	
  one	
  and	
  five	
  years

2012

£’000

813

1,803

2,616

(141)

2,475

2012

£’000

741

1,734

2,475

2011

£’000

50

19

69

(2)

67

2011

£’000

49

18

67

Lease	
  liabilities	
  are	
  effectively	
  secured	
  as	
  the	
  rights	
  to	
  the	
  leased	
  asset	
  reverts	
  to	
  the	
  lessor	
  in	
  the	
  event	
  of	
  default.

The	
  company

The	
  borrowings	
  of	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  comprise	
  the	
  bank	
  loan	
  of	
  £9,565,000	
  (2011	
  £7,087,000)	
  which	
  is	
  denominated	
  in	
  US	
  
dollars	
  (2011:	
  £700,000	
  was	
  denominated	
  in	
  sterling	
  and	
  the	
  remainder	
  was	
  denominated	
  in	
  US	
  Dollars).	
  This	
  amount	
  is	
  repayable	
  
between	
  two	
  and	
  five	
  years	
  (2011:	
  repayable	
  between	
  two	
  and	
  five	
  years).

74

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

17.	
  Business	
  combination	
  
On	
  11	
  June	
  2012	
  the	
  group	
  acquired	
  the	
   in-­‐house	
   epitaxy	
  operation	
  of	
  a	
   leading	
  wireless	
  chip	
  manufacturer.	
   	
  Under	
  the	
   terms	
  of	
  
this	
  trade	
  and	
  assets	
  deal,	
  the	
  Group	
  acquired	
  the	
  leasehold	
  production	
  facility,	
  the	
  production	
  equipment	
  and	
  related	
  inventories;	
  
assumed	
   employment	
   of	
  the	
   workforce;	
   and	
  entered	
   into	
  a	
   long	
   term	
   supply	
   contract.	
   The	
   consideration	
   for	
  the	
   acquisition	
  is	
  
being	
  settled	
  entirely	
  via	
  a	
  contractually	
  agreed	
  price	
  discount	
  on	
  future	
  product	
  sales	
  to	
  the	
  vendor	
  until	
  2016.

The	
  comparison	
  of	
  book	
  value	
  to	
  fair	
  value	
  is	
  summarised	
  as	
  follows:

Intangible	
  assets
Intangible	
  assets
Intangible	
  assets

Property	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment
Property	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment
Property	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Inventory
Inventory
Inventory

Deferred	
  tax	
  asset
Deferred	
  tax	
  asset
Deferred	
  tax	
  asset

Goodwill
Goodwill
Goodwill

Total	
  contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration
Total	
  contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration
Total	
  contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration

Fair	
  value	
  	
  

Book	
  value

Adjustment

Fair	
  value

£’000

-­‐

17,400

1,001

-­‐

-­‐

18,401

£’000

3,116

2,600

-­‐

13,187

18,287

37,190

£’000

3,116

20,000

1,001

13,187

18,287

55,591

The	
  fair	
  value	
   of	
  the	
  intangible	
   assets	
  represents	
  the	
  estimated	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
   supply	
  contract,	
  and	
  has	
  been	
  assessed	
  based	
  on	
  
an	
  imputed	
  royalty	
  stream	
  to	
  recover	
  the	
  estimated	
  cost	
  of	
  product	
  development	
  and	
  qualifications	
  to	
  which	
  the	
  contract	
  relates.

The	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  property	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment	
  has	
  been	
  estimated	
  on	
  a	
  depreciated	
  replacement	
  cost	
  basis,	
  using	
  internal	
  and	
  
external	
  cost	
  data.	
  Inventory	
  has	
  been	
  recognised	
  at	
  the	
  lower	
  of	
  cost	
  and	
  net	
  realisable	
  value.

Deferred	
  tax	
  has	
  been	
  recognised	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  temporary	
  timing	
  differences	
  between	
  the	
   accounting	
  and	
  tax	
  treatments	
  for	
  the	
  
assets	
  and	
  liabilities	
  recognised.

Goodwill	
  reflects	
  items	
  not	
  separately	
  recognisable	
  under	
  IFRS,	
  and	
  largely	
  reflects	
  financial	
  and	
  operational	
  synergies	
  of	
  the	
  
enlarged	
  group	
  including	
  improved	
  economies	
  of	
  scale	
  and	
  equipment	
  utilisation.	
  

The	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  consideration	
  has	
  been	
  estimated	
  based	
  on	
  expected	
  future	
  sales	
  volumes	
  and	
  price	
  discounts.	
  Sales	
  are	
  
recorded	
  at	
  their	
  fair	
  value,	
  but	
  billed	
  at	
  the	
  contractually	
  agreed	
  discounted	
  rate.	
  The	
  discount	
  on	
  each	
  sales	
  transaction	
  is	
  
accounted	
  for	
  as	
  a	
  reduction	
  in	
  the	
  contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  balance.	
  	
  As	
  a	
  guide	
  to	
  the	
  sensitivity	
  of	
  this	
  estimate,	
  if	
  
actual	
  volumes	
  were	
  5%	
  lower	
  than	
  the	
  estimated	
  future	
  volumes	
  then	
  the	
  total	
  consideration	
  would	
  reduce	
  by	
  approximately	
  
£2.8m.	
  

The	
  fair	
  values	
  for	
  intangibles	
  assets	
  and	
  consideration	
  are	
  provisional	
  fair	
  values,	
  and	
  as	
  long	
  term	
  balances	
  have	
  been	
  discounted	
  
at	
  discount	
  rate	
  of	
  1%.

Acquisition	
  related	
  costs	
  of	
  £0.1m	
  have	
  been	
  charged	
  to	
  administration	
  expenses	
  in	
  the	
  consolidated	
  income	
  statement	
  for	
  the	
  
year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012.

Prior	
  to	
  acquisition	
  this	
  business	
  was	
  part	
  of	
  a	
  larger	
  internal	
  manufacturing	
  process,	
  and	
  therefore	
  a	
  separate	
  trading	
  account	
  is	
  
not	
  available.	
  	
  	
  Post	
  acquisition	
  this	
  business	
  unit	
  contributed	
  revenue	
  of	
  £20m,	
  and	
  profit	
  after	
  tax	
  of	
  £4m	
  to	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  
Income	
  Statement.	
  	
  	
  Management	
  believes	
  that	
  it	
  would	
  be	
  impracticable	
  to	
  extrapolate	
  a	
  trading	
  result	
  for	
  a	
  full	
  year	
  2012	
  due	
  to	
  
the	
  impact	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  inventory	
  levels	
  in	
  the	
  supply	
  chain.

The	
  purchase	
  agreement	
  provided	
  that	
  the	
  consideration	
  for	
  the	
  acquisition	
  is	
  settled	
  via	
  a	
  contractually	
  agreed	
  price	
  discount	
  on	
  
product	
  sales	
  to	
  the	
  vendor	
  until	
  2016.	
  Accordingly,	
  the	
  total	
  consideration	
  payable	
  is	
  entirely	
  contingent	
  on	
  future	
  sales,	
  and	
  has	
  
been	
  estimated	
  at	
  £54.6	
  million	
  based	
  on	
  the	
  expected	
  future	
  volumes	
  and	
  price	
  discounts.	
  	
  The	
  revenue	
  on	
  these	
  product	
  sales	
  is	
  
recognised	
  at	
  their	
  full	
  market	
  value	
  but	
  billed	
  net	
  of	
  the	
  contractual	
  discount,	
  hence	
  the	
  operating	
  cash	
  flow	
  is	
  inherently	
  lower	
  
than	
  the	
  operating	
  profit	
  during	
  the	
  discount	
  period.	
  	
  The	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  discount	
  in	
  2012	
  was	
  £8.4m	
  (2011	
  :	
  nil).

If	
  the	
  purchase	
  agreement	
  had	
  provided	
  for	
  the	
  sales	
  to	
  be	
  billed	
  and	
  settled	
  at	
  full	
  market	
  value,	
  and	
  for	
  the	
  purchase	
  
consideration	
  to	
  be	
  paid	
  to	
  the	
  vendor	
  in	
  cash	
  (“Gross	
  basis”),	
  then	
  the	
  operating	
  cash	
  generated	
  from	
  the	
  trade	
  would	
  have	
  been	
  
reported	
  at	
  the	
  higher	
  value,	
  and	
  the	
  purchase	
  consideration	
  paid	
  would	
  have	
  been	
  classified	
  as	
  an	
  investing	
  activity.	
  	
  Assuming	
  no	
  
other	
  changes	
  to	
  the	
  terms	
  of	
  trade	
  (including	
  volumes,	
  timing	
  and	
  pricing)	
  then	
  under	
  the	
  Gross	
  basis	
  there	
  would	
  be	
  no	
  impact	
  
on	
  the	
  Consolidated	
  Balance	
  Sheet	
  or	
  Income	
  Statement,	
  however	
  the	
  cash	
  flow	
  presentation	
  would	
  have	
  been	
  impacted	
  as	
  
follows:

£’000

Net	
  cash	
  generated	
  from	
  operating	
  activities

Net	
  cash	
  used	
  in	
  investing	
  activities

As	
  currently
reported
4,777

(26,159)

Impact
8,379

(8,379)

Gross	
  basis
13,156

(34,538)

75

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

18.	
  Share	
  capital

Group	
  and	
  Company

Allotted,	
  called	
  up	
  and	
  fully	
  paid

Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  1p	
  each

2012

Number
of	
  shares

2012

£’000

2011

Number
of	
  shares

2011

£’000

588,215,751

5,882

525,111,639

5,251

The	
  movement	
  in	
  the	
  number	
  of	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  was:

At	
  1	
  January

Employee	
  share	
  schemes

Placing

At	
  31	
  December

2012
Number

2011
Number

525,111,639

515,327,055

19,336,112

43,768,000

9,804,267

-­‐

588,215,751

525,111,639

63,104,112	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  (2011:	
  9,784,584	
  ordinary	
  shares)	
  were	
  issued	
  during	
  the	
  as	
  follows:

Employee	
  share	
  schemes

Placing

2012
Number
of	
  shares

2012
Consideration

2011
Number
of	
  shares

2011
Consideration

19,336,112 Nil	
  cost	
  to	
  52.08p

9,784,584 Nil	
  cost	
  to	
  52.08p

43,768,000

63,104,112

24.00p

-­‐

-­‐

9,804,267

The	
  group’s	
  objectives	
  when	
  managing	
  capital	
  are	
  to	
  safeguard	
  the	
  entity’s	
  ability	
  to	
  continue	
  as	
  a	
  going	
  concern	
  so	
  that	
  it	
  can	
  
continue	
  to	
  provide	
  returns	
  for	
  shareholders	
  and	
  benefits	
  for	
  other	
  stakeholders.

The	
  group	
  sets	
  the	
  amount	
  of	
  capital	
  in	
  proportion	
  to	
  risk.	
  	
  	
  The	
  group	
  manages	
  the	
  capital	
  structure	
  and	
  makes	
  adjustments	
  to	
  it	
  
in	
  the	
  light	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  economic	
  conditions	
  and	
  the	
  characteristic	
  of	
  the	
  underlying	
  assets.	
  The	
  group	
  monitors	
  capital	
  by	
  
reviewing	
  net	
  debt	
  against	
  shareholders’	
  funds.	
  	
  The	
  position	
  of	
  these	
  indicators	
  and	
  the	
  movement	
  during	
  the	
  period	
  is	
  shown	
  in	
  
the	
  Five	
  Year	
  Financial	
  Summary	
  and	
  on	
  page	
  [18]	
  of	
  the	
  Directors’	
  Report.

19.	
  Share	
  based	
  payments
The	
  total	
  amount	
  charged	
  to	
  the	
  income	
  statement	
  in	
  2012	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  share	
  based	
  payments	
  was	
  £1,360,000	
  (2011:	
  £1,284,000).	
  

Share	
  option	
  scheme

The	
  IQE	
  Plc	
  Share	
  Option	
  Scheme	
  was	
  adopted	
  on	
  26	
  May	
  2000	
  and	
  amended	
  by	
  shareholders	
  at	
  the	
  Annual	
  General	
  Meeting	
  on	
  
17	
  May	
  2002.	
  	
  	
  Under	
  the	
  scheme,	
  the	
  Remuneration	
  Committee	
  can	
  grant	
  options	
  over	
  shares	
  in	
  the	
  company	
  to	
  employees	
  of	
  the	
  
group.	
  	
  

Options	
  are	
  granted	
  with	
  a	
  contractual	
  life	
  of	
  ten	
  years	
  and	
  with	
  a	
  fixed	
  exercise	
  price	
  equal	
  to	
  the	
  market	
  value	
  of	
  the	
  shares	
  
under	
  option	
  at	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  grant	
  or	
  as	
  otherwise	
  disclosed	
  in	
  the	
  remuneration	
  report.	
  Options	
  become	
  exercisable	
  between	
  one	
  
and	
  four	
  years	
  from	
  the	
  date	
  of	
  grant	
  subject	
  to	
  continued	
  employment	
  and	
  the	
  achievement	
  of	
  performance	
  conditions,	
  including	
  
growth	
  in	
  EBITDA	
  and	
  earnings	
  per	
  share	
  against	
  various	
  targets.	
  The	
  group	
  has	
  no	
  legal	
  or	
  constructive	
  obligation	
  to	
  repurchase	
  
or	
  settle	
  the	
  options	
  in	
  cash.

76

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Options	
  are	
  valued	
  using	
  the	
  Black-­‐Scholes	
  option-­‐pricing	
  model	
  and	
  the	
  total	
  amount	
  to	
  be	
  expensed	
  is	
  charged	
  to	
  income	
  
statement	
  over	
  the	
  vesting	
  period	
  of	
  the	
  option.	
  The	
  principal	
  assumptions	
  used	
  in	
  the	
  calculation	
  of	
  the	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  share	
  options	
  
are	
  as	
  follows:	
  

Principal	
  assumptions

Weighted	
  average	
  share	
  price	
  at	
  grant	
  date

Weighted	
  average	
  exercise	
  price

Weighted	
  average	
  vesting	
  period	
  (years)

Option	
  life	
  (years)

Weighted	
  average	
  expected	
  life	
  (years)

Weighted	
  average	
  expected	
  volatility	
  factor

Weighted	
  average	
  risk	
  free	
  rate

Dividend	
  yield

2012

27.75p

6.40p

3

10

3

61%

0.37%

0%

2011

22.35p

22.88p

3

10

3

72%

0.90%

0%

The	
  expected	
  volatility	
  factor	
  is	
  based	
  on	
  historical	
  share	
  price	
  volatility	
  over	
  the	
  three	
  years	
  immediately	
  preceding	
  the	
  grant	
  of	
  
the	
  option.	
  	
  The	
  expected	
  life	
  is	
  the	
  average	
  expected	
  period	
  to	
  exercise.	
  	
  The	
  risk	
  free	
  rate	
  of	
  return	
  is	
  the	
  yield	
  of	
  zero-­‐coupon	
  UK	
  
government	
  bonds	
  of	
  a	
  term	
  consistent	
  with	
  the	
  assumed	
  option	
  life.	
  

Performance	
  conditions	
  are	
  incorporated	
  into	
  the	
  calculation	
  of	
  fair	
  value	
  by	
  estimating	
  the	
  proportion	
  of	
  share	
  options	
  that	
  will	
  
vest	
  and	
  be	
  exercised	
  based	
  on	
  a	
  combination	
  of	
  historical	
  trends	
  and	
  future	
  expected	
  trading	
  performance.	
  These	
  are	
  reassessed	
  
at	
  the	
  end	
  of	
  each	
  period	
  for	
  each	
  tranche	
  of	
  unvested	
  options.	
  	
  	
  	
  

The	
  fair	
  value	
  of	
  options	
  granted	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  ended	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  was	
  £1,521,920	
  (2011:	
  £373,263).	
  

The	
  movements	
  on	
  share	
  options	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  were	
  as	
  follows:

At	
  1	
  January

Granted

Exercised

Cancelled/lapsed

At	
  31	
  December

	
  	
  	
  2012
Number
	
  of	
  options
51,043,125

9,471,944

(17,702,729)

(4,118,826)

38,693,514

2012
Average	
  exercise
price	
  (pence)
10.14

6.40

8.88

7.11

10.12

	
  	
  	
  2011
Number
	
  of	
  options
58,617,656

5,889,277

(8,943,919)

(4,519,889)

51,043,125

2011
Average	
  exercise
price	
  (pence)
8.96

22.88

6.88

17.95

10.14

The	
  weighted	
  average	
  share	
  price	
  at	
  the	
  time	
  of	
  the	
  options	
  exercised	
  during	
  2012	
  was	
  25.51p	
  (2011:	
  46.91p).

As	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012,	
  the	
  total	
  number	
  of	
  options	
  held	
  by	
  employees	
  was	
  38,693,514	
  (2011:	
  51,043,125)	
  as	
  follows:

Option	
  price	
  pence/share
1.00p	
  –	
  86.20p

5.63p	
  -­‐	
  10.17p
6.87p	
  -­‐	
  10.25p
10.40p	
  -­‐	
  19.42p
0.00p	
  -­‐	
  19.42p
16.10p	
  -­‐	
  16.10p
0.00p	
  -­‐	
  17.07p
0.00p	
  –	
  45.58p
9.15p	
  –	
  50.25p
0.00p	
  –	
  86.19p
At	
  31	
  December

Option	
  period	
  ending
31	
  December	
  2012

	
  2012
	
  Number	
  of	
  options
-­‐

	
  2011
	
  Number	
  of	
  options
1,475,469

31	
  December	
  2014
31	
  December	
  2015
31	
  December	
  2016
31	
  December	
  2017
31	
  December	
  2018
31	
  December	
  2019
31	
  December	
  2020
31	
  December	
  2021
31	
  December	
  2022

1,234,318
704,856
1,850,638
5,380,791
247,029
8,619,521
6,879,449
6,060,154
7,716,758
38,693,514

6,272,579
934,352
8,032,500
5,625,175
508,221
10,269,732
12,035,820
5,889,277
-­‐
51,043,125

77

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

20.	
  Parent	
  company	
  profit	
  and	
  loss	
  
As	
  permitted	
  by	
  Section	
  408	
  of	
  the	
  Companies	
  Act	
  2006,	
  the	
  income	
  statement	
  of	
  the	
  parent	
  company	
  is	
  not	
  presented	
  as	
  part	
  of	
  
these	
  financial	
  statements.	
  	
  The	
  parent	
  company’s	
  profit	
  for	
  the	
  financial	
  year	
  amounted	
  to	
  £1,974,000	
  (2011:	
  profit	
  £1,243,000).	
  	
  	
  

21.	
  Cash	
  generated	
  from	
  operations

The	
  Group
Operating	
  profit	
  
Depreciation	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment	
  

Amortisation	
  of	
  intangible	
  assets

Gain	
  on	
  sale	
  of	
  property,	
  plant	
  and	
  equipment

Contingent	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  (settled	
  through	
  contractual	
  discounts)	
  

Share	
  based	
  payments

Cash	
  inflow	
  from	
  operations	
  before	
  changes	
  in	
  working	
  capital

Increase	
  in	
  inventories

(Increase)/decrease	
  in	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables

Increase/(decrease)	
  in	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

Cash	
  inflow	
  from	
  operations

The	
  Company
Operating	
  loss	
  
Share	
  based	
  payments

Cash	
  (outflow)/inflow	
  from	
  operations	
  before	
  changes	
  in	
  working	
  capital

Increase	
  in	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  receivables

Decrease	
  in	
  trade	
  and	
  other	
  payables

2012
£’000
7,014
5,998

1,495

-­‐

(8,379)

1,360

7,488

(3,030)

(5,924)

5,575

4,109

2012
£’000
(927)
1,031

104

(10,258)

(563)

2011
£’000
7,373
4,175

1,123

(68)

-­‐

1,284

13,887

(3,087)

2,033

(2,010)

10,823

2011
£’000
(924)
1,085

161

(8,170)

(444)

Cash	
  outflow	
  from	
  operations

(10,717)

(8,453)

22.	
  Reconciliation	
  of	
  net	
  cash	
  flow	
  to	
  movement	
  in	
  net	
  debt

Decrease	
  in	
  cash	
  in	
  the	
  year

Loans	
  received

Loans	
  repaid

Leases	
  repaid

Net	
  movement	
  resulting	
  from	
  cash	
  flows

Net	
  (debt)/funds	
  at	
  1	
  January

Net	
  movement	
  resulting	
  from	
  cash	
  flows

Non-­‐cash	
  movements

Net	
  debt	
  at	
  31	
  December

78

2012

£’000

(443)

(10,877)

1,335

48

(9,937)

(3,921)

(9,937)

(1,625)

(15,483)

2011

£’000

(9,284)

(7,267)

5,777

1,156

(9,618)

7,021

(9,618)

(1,324)

(3,921)

	
  
IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

23.	
  Analysis	
  of	
  net	
  debt

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents

Loans	
  due	
  after	
  one	
  year

Loans	
  due	
  within	
  one	
  year

Finance	
  leases	
  due	
  after	
  one	
  year

Finance	
  leases	
  due	
  within	
  one	
  year

Total	
  borrowings

Net	
  debt

At	
  1	
  
January
2012
£’000
3,233

(7,087)

-­‐

(18)

(49)

(7,154)

(3,921)

Cash
flow
£’000
(443)

(7,855)

(1,687)

18

30

(9,494)

(9,937)

Other
non-­‐cash
movements
£’000
(17)

848

-­‐

(1,734)

(722)

(1,608)

(1,625)

At	
  31
December
2012
£’000
2,773

(14,094)

(1,687)

(1,734)

(741)

(18,256)

(15,483)

Cash	
  and	
  cash	
  equivalents	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  comprised	
  balances	
  held	
  in	
  instant	
  access	
  bank	
  accounts.

Non-­‐cash	
  movements	
  include	
  the	
  drawdown	
  of	
  a	
  finance	
  lease	
  and	
  foreign	
  exchange	
  movements	
  on	
  US	
  dollar	
  denominated	
  
borrowings.

24.	
  Principal	
  subsidiary	
  undertakings

Name	
  of	
  company
IQE	
  (Europe)	
  Limited	
  

Class	
  of	
  capital
Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  £1

Proportion	
  of
shares	
  held
100%*

IQE	
  Inc	
  

Common	
  stock	
  of	
  $0.001

100%*

Activity
Manufacture	
  of	
  advanced	
  
semiconductor	
  materials

Manufacture	
  of	
  advanced	
  
semiconductor	
  materials

IQE	
  RF	
  LLC	
  

Limited	
  liability	
  
company

100%

Manufacture	
  of	
  advanced	
  
semiconductor	
  materials

IQE	
  Silicon	
  Compounds	
  Limited Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  £1

100%

Manufacture	
  of	
  silicon	
  epitaxy

Country	
  of
incorporation

UK

USA

USA

UK

MBE	
  Technology	
  Pte	
  Ltd	
  

Preferred	
  shares	
  of	
  S$1
Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  S$1

Wafer	
  Technology	
  Limited

Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  £1

100%

100%
100%*

Manufacture	
  of	
  advanced	
  
semiconductor	
  materials

Singapore

Manufacture	
  of	
  semiconductor	
  
compounds	
  and	
  ultra	
  high	
  purity	
  
materials

NanoGaN	
  Limited

Ordinary	
  shares	
  of	
  
£0.001

100%

Development	
  of	
  advanced	
  
semiconductor	
  materials

Galaxy	
  Compound	
  
Semiconductors	
  Inc

Common	
  stock	
  of	
  $0.00	
  
par	
  value

100%*

Manufacture	
  of	
  semiconductor	
  
compounds

* Indirect	
  holdings
* The	
  proportion	
  of	
  voting	
  rights	
  of	
  subsidiaries	
  held	
  by	
  the	
  group	
  is	
  the	
  same	
  as	
  the	
  proportion	
  of	
  shares	
  held.

UK

UK

USA

79

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

25.	
  Post	
  balance	
  sheet	
  event
On	
  15	
  January	
  2013,	
  IQE	
  plc	
  completed	
  the	
  acquisition	
  of	
  the	
  Kopin	
  Wireless,	
  the	
  compound	
  semiconductor	
  epiwafer	
  
manufacturing	
  	
  business	
  of	
  	
  Kopin	
  Corporation	
  (“Kopin”),	
  a	
  NASDAQ	
  listed	
  entity.	
  	
  

The	
  consideration	
  for	
  the	
  acquisition	
  was	
  $75m,	
  of	
  which	
  $60m	
  was	
  paid	
  in	
  cash	
  on	
  completion,	
  and	
  $15m	
  falls	
  payable	
  in	
  January	
  
2016.

The	
  assets	
  acquired	
  were	
  the	
  trade	
  and	
  assets	
  of	
  Kopin	
  Wireless’	
  	
  US	
  domiciled	
  business,	
  which	
  operates	
  from	
  a	
  long	
  leasehold	
  
premises	
  located	
  in	
  Massachusetts	
  USA;	
  	
  and	
  	
  its	
  90%	
  equity	
  stake	
  in	
  its	
  Taiwanese	
  subsidiary	
  (KTC),	
  which	
  	
  operates	
  from	
  a	
  
freehold	
  premises	
  in	
  Hsinchu	
  Taiwan.	
  	
  	
  

This	
  acquisition	
  brings	
  a	
  number	
  of	
  strategic	
  advantages	
  to	
  IQE,	
  including	
  :

•

•

•

•

•

a	
  HBT	
  business	
  to	
  complement	
  IQE’s	
  existing	
  pHEMT	
  business;

greater	
  customer	
  diversity	
  to	
  help	
  mitigate	
  against	
  the	
  impact	
  of	
  changes	
  in	
  market	
  share	
  between	
  customers;

expands	
  IQE’s	
  Asian	
  footprint,	
  providing	
  improved	
  access	
  to	
  the	
  growing	
  Asian	
  market;

improved	
  economies	
  of	
  scale;	
  and

providing	
  access	
  to	
  significant	
  expected	
  cost	
  synergies.

The	
  upfront	
  consideration	
  of	
  $60	
  million	
  	
  was	
  part	
  financed	
  by	
  $40	
  million	
  of	
  acquisition	
  finance	
  provided	
  by	
  HSBC.	
  	
  The	
  balance	
  
was	
  financed	
  from	
  the	
  proceeds	
  of	
  a	
  placing	
  of	
  56,900,961	
  new	
  ordinary	
  shares	
  at	
  29.00p.	
  	
  The	
  deferred	
  consideration	
  of	
  $15	
  
million	
  will	
  be	
  settled	
  through	
  future	
  cash	
  generation.

26.	
  Related	
  party	
  transactions
The	
  group	
  incurred	
  professional	
  fees	
  and	
  expenses	
  during	
  the	
  year	
  of	
  £70,000	
  (2011:	
  £70,000)	
  payable	
  to	
  Horton	
  Corporate	
  
Finance	
  and	
  £35,000	
  (2011:	
  £35,000)	
  payable	
  to	
  Fishstone	
  Limited.	
  	
  Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth,	
  who	
  is	
  a	
  director	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc,	
  is	
  a	
  director	
  of	
  
Horton	
  Corporate	
  Finance.	
  	
  	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson,	
  who	
  is	
  a	
  director	
  of	
  IQE	
  Plc,	
  is	
  also	
  a	
  director	
  of	
  Fishstone	
  Limited.	
  	
  An	
  amount	
  of	
  £26,000	
  
(2011:	
  £26,000)	
  was	
  outstanding	
  to	
  these	
  parties	
  at	
  the	
  year-­‐end.	
  The	
  group	
  incurred	
  professional	
  fees	
  and	
  expenses	
  during	
  the	
  
year	
  of	
  £12,000	
  (2011:	
  £nil)	
  payable	
  to	
  Dr	
  D	
  Grant	
  which	
  remains	
  outstanding	
  at	
  year	
  end.

27.	
  Operating	
  lease	
  commitments
The	
  group	
  was	
  committed	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  and	
  31	
  December	
  2011	
  to	
  making	
  the	
  following	
  aggregate	
  payments	
  in	
  respect	
  of	
  
non-­‐cancellable	
  operating	
  leases:

Due	
  within	
  one	
  year

Due	
  between	
  two	
  and	
  five	
  years

Due	
  after	
  five	
  years

28.	
  Commitments
The	
  group	
  had	
  the	
  following	
  capital	
  commitments	
  at	
  31	
  December	
  2012	
  and	
  31	
  December	
  2011:

Authorised	
  and	
  contracted	
  for

2012

£’000

2,062

7,440

9,065

18,567

2012
£’000

-­‐

2011

£’000

2,130

6,833

10,337

19,300

2011
£’000

243

80

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

Officers	
  and	
  professional	
  advisers

IQE	
  plc	
  is	
  a	
  public	
  limited	
  company	
  incorporated	
  in	
  England	
  and	
  Wales.	
  

Directors
Dr	
  G	
  H	
  H	
  Ainsworth	
  BSc,	
  Ph.D,	
  FCA	
  (Chairman,	
  Non-­‐Executive)
Dr	
  A	
  W	
  Nelson	
  OBE,	
  BSc,	
  Ph.D,	
  FREng	
  (President	
  and	
  Chief	
  Executive	
  Officer)
Mr	
  S	
  J	
  Gibson	
  OBE	
  (Non-­‐Executive)
Dr	
  David	
  Grant	
  CBE,	
  FREng,	
  FLSW,	
  CEng,	
  FIET	
  (Senior	
  Independent	
  Director,	
  appointed	
  18	
  September	
  2012)	
  
Mr	
  P	
  J	
  Rasmussen	
  BSc,	
  ACA	
  (Finance	
  Director	
  and	
  Company	
  Secretary)
Dr	
  H	
  R	
  Williams	
  BSc,	
  Ph.D,	
  CEng,	
  MIMechE,	
  MCIBSE	
  (Operations	
  Director)
Mr	
  A	
  G	
  Meldrum	
  (Business	
  Development	
  Director,	
  resigned	
  21	
  September	
  2012)

Registered	
  office
Pascal	
  Close,	
  St	
  Mellons,	
  Cardiff,	
  CF3	
  0LW

Principal	
  Bankers
HSBC	
  Bank	
  Plc
8	
  Canada	
  Square,	
  London,	
  E14	
  5HQ

Auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers	
  LLP
One	
  Kingsway,	
  Cardiff,	
  CF10	
  3PW

Nominated	
  advisers	
  and	
  brokers
Espirito	
  Santo	
  Investment	
  Bank,	
  incorporating	
  Execution	
  Noble	
  Limited
10	
  Paternoster	
  Square,	
  London,	
  EC4M	
  7AL

Joint	
  brokers
Canaccord	
  Genuity	
  Limited
88	
  Wood	
  Street,	
  London,	
  EC2V	
  7QR

Registrars
Capita	
  Registrars
Northern	
  House,	
  Woodsome	
  Park,	
  Fenay	
  Bridge,	
  Huddersfield,	
  HD8	
  0GA

Investor	
  relations
Chris	
  Meadows
Tel	
  +44(0)29	
  2083	
  9400
Fax	
  +44(0)29	
  2079	
  4592
investors@iqep.com

81

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

82

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

IQE	
  plc
Pascal	
  Close
Cardiff
United	
  Kingdom
CF3	
  0LW

tel:	
  +44	
  (0)29	
  2083	
  9400
Fax:	
  +44	
  (0)29	
  2079	
  4592

www.iqep.com

©	
  2013	
  IQE	
  plc

83

IQE Annual Report & Financial Statements 2012

84